Home

Pioneer AVIC Z3 Operation Manual

1. 194 En If there is a parallel road If there is another road very nearby such as in the case of an elevated freeway If you take a recently opened road that is not on the map Appendix Appendix aE e fyou drive in zig zags e fyou are driving on a long straight road or a gently curving road e fyou are on a steep mountain road with many height changes e fthe road has connected hairpin bends x pu ddy e fthere isa loop or similar road configura tion e fyou enter or exit a multi storey parking lot or similar using a spiral ramp e fyou take a ferry Appendix gt Appendix e f your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si milar structure e f you drive very slowly or in a start and stop manner as in a traffic congestion e lf your vehicle s wheels spin such as ona gravel road or in snow e f you put on chains or change your tires for ones with a different size e If trees or other obstacles block the GPS signals for a considerable period 196 En e f you join the road after driving around a large parking lot TLL v e e When you pass around a traffic circle OC e When starting driving immediately after starting the engine e f you turn your navigation system on while driving Some types of vehicles may not output a speed signal while driving at just a few kilo meters per h
2. Stock Info J My Favorites A Emergency Info J J 188 En Appendix Appendix c Short Cut Selection View Mode Map menu Displayed Info Overlay POI Day Night Display AV J Z J Guide Mode Road Color Language Regional Set tings Time Regional Set tings Installation Angle Setup Hardware Defined A J Locations Modify Current Settings menu Location Background Pic ture Setting Items other than above J J J 3D Calibration Status Hard ware Right and left gauge type Ad Vehicle Dynamics just Look J J xipusddy Audio Settings All items J _ Mute Set Clock DISP REC System Settings Mode Other items J Audio functions Repeat Random settings J J Music Library LI Track data J BRARY Playlist Last playback position J XM Alert on off for My Mix J J J DVD All settings J CD All settings J a _ ROM MP3 All settings J a FM Preset memory and the other _ o 7 settings AM Preset memory and the other o 7 settings Preset memory and the other TV settings v _ E REAR SCREEN Rear Screen setting J 2 Picture Adjust J _ Others Display Tilt J Appendix gt Appendix If system errors frequently occur If system errors frequently occur and the pow
3. O The system may calculate a route that in cludes ferry way even if On is selected Avoid Freeway This setting controls whether freeways may be included in the route calculation Fi Off Chapter Basic Operation CH Calculate a route that may include freeways fq On Calculate a route that avoids freeways O The system may calculate a route that in cludes freeway even if On is selected Time restrictions This setting controls whether streets or bridges have traffic restrictions during a cer tain time should be taken into account O If you want to set your route to avoid opened bridges select On On Calculate a route while avoiding streets or bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer tain time FA Off Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restric tions O The system may calculate a route that in cludes streets or bridges that are subject to traffic restrictions during a certain time even if On is selected A CAUTION If the time difference is not set correctly the navi gation system cannot consider traffic regulations correctly Set the time difference correctly Refer to Setting the time difference on page 89 Learning Route The system learns the travel history of your ve hicle for each road This setting controls whether or not the travel history should be taken into account Fj On Calculate the route with the travel history taken into
4. Street or place Direction Incident Distance to the location The incident numbers currently dis played and the total number of inci dents O The incidents that have already been read will be displayed in white Unread incidents will be in yellow 6 Sort key CE You can sort the traffic information in alpha betical order OSSONO You can sort the traffic information by dis tance from your current position For the list displayed when you touch Traf fic Events the list will be sorted according to the linear distance from the vehicle posi tion to the traffic information UOIFEULIOJU DIZJeAL Huisp En 65 Chapter KD Using Traffic Information For the list displayed when you touch Traf fic On Route the list will be sorted accord ing to the distance from the vehicle position to the traffic information KES You can sort the traffic information accord ing to the incident The list will be sorted in the order of closed blocked roads traffic congestion acci dents road works and others Refresh E When new traffic information is received current information is changed or old infor mation has been removed the list is up dated to reflect the new situation D Touching amp allows you to check the loca tion on a map Traffic information without positional information cannot be checked on a map 3 Select an incident you want to view in detail The details of the selected
5. Super Bass PPowar lu Natural Vocal Flai Euston Custom O When Flat is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer curve Adjusting equalizer curves You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired e A separate Custom1 curve can be created for each source If you make adjustments when a curve Super Bass Powerful Natural Vocal Flat or Custom1 is se lected the equalizer curve settings will be memorized in Custom1 e A Custom2 curve can be created common to all sources If you make adjustments when Custom2 curve is selected the Custom2 curve will be updated O The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized tor each of the source selected but one curve is shared for the following sources e AM and FM e EXT 1 and EXT 2 e AUX and AV INPUT In the built in DVD drive different curves can be memorized for a DVD Video and a CD CD DA or MP3 You can adjust the center frequency level and the Q curve characteristics of each band Low Mid High Band You can select the band you want to ad just e Frequency You can select which frequency to be set as the center frequency e Level You can adjust the decibel dB level of the selected band e Q You can select the details of the curve characteristics The following figure shows the characteris
6. Memorizing the song title and the artist name of asong The song title and artist name of the current song you are listening to can be memorized to My Mix Touch and hold Memo The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are memorized and Song Saved is displayed O The song title and artist name of up to 10 tracks can be memorized If you try to save more than 10 tracks FULL is displayed You cannot memorize a song that does not have song title and artist name information There is a possibility the memorized title is not displayed correctly When the memorized song is broadcast Alert message is displayed Touch Jump to switch to that station and you can listen to that track If you touch Stay the cannel does not switch O Ifthe alert for the song is OFF or Alert Off is selected no notification will be provided even when that song is broad Cast gt For details reter to Setting the alert for each memorized song on this page gt For details refer to Switching the alert setting on this page O If there is a slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the track being broadcast no notification will be pro vided though they are the same song O Alert may not be provided depending on the situation of the navigation system Setting the alert for each memorized song You can change the setting of the alert when the track is broadcast again
7. Retailer Chains BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY COSTCO FACTORY 2 U KMART KOHLS ROSS SAM S CLUB STEIN MART T J MAXX TARGET STORES WAL MART Retai ler Chains Others Category name Hotel AMERI HOST INN BAYMONT INN amp SUITES BEST WESTERN COURTYARD BY MARRIOTT CROWNE PLAZA DAYS INN DOUBLE TREE ECONO LODGE EMBASSY SUITES FAIRFIELD INN HAMPTON INN HILTON HILTON GARDEN INN HOLIDAY INN HOLI DAY INN EXPRESS HOMEWOOD SUITES HOWARD JOHNSON HYATT KNIGHTS INN LA QUINTA INN MARRIOTT MOTEL 6 QUALITY COMFORT CLARION RAMADA INN RED ROOF INN RESIDENCE INNS SCOTTISH INN SHERATON STAYBRIDGE SUITES STUDIO 6 SUPER 8 TRAVELODGE WINGATE INN Hotel Others Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 18 Category name Category name Car Dealer Medical ACURA AUDI BMW BUICK CADILLAC CHEVRO Doctor Dentist Veterinarian Emergency Medical Ser LET CHRYSLER DAEWOO DODGE FORD HONDA vice Hospital Pharmacy HYUNDAI INFINITI ISUZU JAGUAR JEEP KIA LAND ROVER LEXUS LINCOLN MAZDA MER Category name CEDES BENZ MITSUBISHI NISSAN OLDSMOBILE School PONTIAC PORSCHE SAAB SATURN SUBARU SU University amp College Nursery School Elementary ZUKI TOYOTA VOLKSWAGEN VOLVO Car Dealer School Junior High School High School Vocational Others School Category name Rental and Other Services Rental Car Video Rental Laundromat Dry Cleaners Category name El
8. Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Checking the current route Route Options Route Profile Displaying the route profile screen Route Options Next Guidance You can hear the information of next guidance point Canceling the route Route Options Cancel Route gt If the route is already set touch VOICE icon to cancel the current route Route Options Cancel Waypoint If the waypoint is already set touch VOICE icon to cancel route until next waypoint Checking the traffic list Traffic Information Traffic Events List gt Displaying the traffic event list Traffic Information Traffic On Route List gt Displaying the traffic event list on your route Traffic Information Traffic Flow List gt Displaying the traffic flow list Erase the tracking Other Operation Erase Tracks gt Touch VOICE icon to delete the tracking Viewing the Emergency Info screen Other Operation Emergency Information gt Displaying the Emergency info screen Turning on or off the Overlay POI Other Operation Display Overlay POI gt Displaying the selected POI in Overlay POI Other Operation Hide Overlay POI gt Turn off Overlay POI Voice commands related to hands free phoning The following verbal commands can be used both in navigation screen and audio operation N O pil GD GD 5 Operating the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology
9. Chapter suoipuny UOI eHIAEN 104 SHhuljZas jesau p ay HulAyipo Chapter ED Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions To clear values If you want to delete the learned results stored in Distance Speed Pulse or Learning Sta tus touch the relevant result then touch Yes O If you select Learning Status you can se lect Reset All or Reset Distance Study To clear all learning statuses touch Reset All To clear only the Distance study touch Reset Distance Study O Touch Reset All for the following cases After changing the installation position of the navigation system After changing the installation angle of the navigation system After moving the navigation system to another vehicle 1 When the distance accuracy is low touch Reset Distance Study O Touching Reset All returns the installa tion angle setting also to the default or fac tory setting Reconfigure the setting gt For details refer to Correcting the installa tion angle on this page O The navigation system can automatically use its sensor memory based on the outer dimensions of the tires Correcting the installation angle You can correct the installation angle of the navigation system Correcting the installation angle improves the accuracy of sensor learn ing even if the unit is not facing center Select the orientation of the LCD panel trom the left center and right 1 Touch
10. The information registered as Emergency Info appears on the screen You are currently at Your current position is indicated by the street name latitude and longitude Personal Information Your VIN number insurance policy number and the telephone number of your insur ance company can be displayed once en tered by the user Emergency TOW service phone The phone number of the subscribing Emergency TOW service can be displayed once entered by the user The default or fac tory setting is the phone number of the Emergency Roadside Assistance service provided by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc 1 year of free Emergency Roadside As sistance service 1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assis tance service is available to all registered owners and provided by Signature s Nation wide Auto Club Inc The first year of Emer gency Roadside Assistance service is paid for by Pioneer only if your navigation system is registered with Pioneer and you sign up on line with Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc at the time you register your navi gation system with Pioneer If you have not signed up for this service with Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc or if your free one year period has expired you are subject to charges by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc You are also subject to charges by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc for roadside services not included in the Emergency Roadside Assistance
11. When you make a call to the phone number in Received Calls without you can add in front of that number by touching To de lete touch again in that time MY PARENTS Phone 0492288240 Touch to make a call 4 Toend the call touch g at the top right of the screen O Up to 30 entries for each of the dialed num ber and received call histories are recorded automatically When the number of entries exceeds 30 the entries will be deleted from the oldest one CM You can clear the dialed number or received call history gt For details refer to Editing the received call or dialed number history on page 86 Buluoud 32 1j spueyH buisp Chapter ED Using Hands free Phoning Calling a number in the phone book After finding the list in the Phone Book you want to call you can select the number and make the call O Before using this function you need to transfer the phone book stored in your cel lular phone to the navigation system gt For details refer to ransferring the phone book on the next page 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Phone Book The phone book screen appears 3 Touch a name from the list to make a call If you touch an alphabet tab you can jump to the first page of the contacts whose names start with that letter Phone Book 6 400 May Th aay rRewor mo MY FRIENOE MY GIRLFRIEND ey My PARENTS 4
12. 1 Touch Memo Edit Chapter Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS 14 2 Touch Alert On or Alert Off When the alert setting is Alert Off DIME is displayed on the information plate Deleting the memorized songs You can delete each one of the memorized songs from the song title list 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch and hold the track you want to delete A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion O To delete all songs that are memorized touch Delete All 3 Touch Yes Using the direct traffic announcement function You can listen to the memorized Instant Trat fic amp Weather channel by directly calling it up with the T button on the navigation unit Only one station can be memorized O This function is not available with GEX P910XM and GEX P900XM Memorize a Instant Traffic amp Weather channel 1 Tune into Instant Traffic amp Weather channel 2 Press and hold T button for two sec onds or more That Instant Traffic amp Weather channel will be memorized 1 The channel 000 and 001 can not be mem orized newly although the channel 001 is the default O Even if you use the SiriusConnect universal tuner together only one station can be memorized The station memorized after ward will overwrite the existing one Calling up the memorized Instant Traffic amp Weather channel Press T button O You can call up a Instant Traffic amp
13. 9 Miscellaneous This is the exclusive and complete Agree ment between Tele Atlas and you regarding its subject matter Nothing in this Agree ment shall create a joint venture partner ship or principal agent relationship between Tele Atlas and you The internal laws of Cali fornia shall govern this Agreement and you consent to the jurisdiction of the Northern District of California or the State of Califor nia for the County of Santa Clara Sections 2 4 and 7 11 shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement This Agree ment may be amended altered or modified only by Tele Atlas You may not assign any part of this Agreement without Tele Atlas prior written consent You acknowledge and understand that the Data may be subject to restrictions on exportation and agree to comply with any applicable export laws In the event that any provision or part of a pro vision of this Agreement is determined to be invalid illegal or unenforceable such provi sion or part thereof shall be stricken trom this Agreement and the remainder of this Agreement shall be valid legal and enforce able to the maximum extent possible Any notice under this Agreement shall be deliv ered by courier to Tele Atlas North America Inc Attention Contracts Department 11 La fayette Street Lebanon NH 03766 USA The covenants and obligations undertaken by you herein are intended for the direct bene fit of Tele Atlas and may be enforc
14. O Although the stock price information dis played onscreen is updated every 30 sec onds approx these prices are not real time values Registering stocks to be displayed 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Stock Info 2 Touch Add 3 Input the Ticker text for the stocks you want to display then touch OK Enter Stock Ticker 0 9 Punc Oper Sym 10 En You can switch the upper line to input the number and marks Touch to toggle the selection The method for inputting the text is almost same as for inputting street names gt For more details about Text input meth od refer to Operation of state selection screen on page 29 O If the input ticker symbol does not match in full the actual ticker symbol for the stock you may not be able to find it Deleting stocks to be displayed onscreen Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks If 12 stocks are already registered delete as many entries as necessary to add new stocks 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Stock Info 2 Touch Delete 3 Touch the ticker of the stock you want to delete A red check appears next to the ticker you touched O To delete all registered stocks touch AII Red checks will appear next to all tickers 4 Touch Delete A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion 5 Touch Yes Storing browsable information XM special contents c
15. press accept button on the cellular phone when a call arrives hands free phoning eeeoeeee2e20e020200000008088080880888080 80 may not be performed o e The registered name appears if the phone number of the received call is already regis tered in the phone book When one phone number is registered under different names the name that comes Tirst alohabe tically is displayed e f the phone number of the received call is not registered in the phone book the phone number of the received call appears phone Depending on the cellular phone that is connected to this navigation system via Bluetooth technology this navigation sys tem cannot display the phone book cor rectly Some characters may be garbled or first name and last name is put in reverse order If the phone book in the cellular phone con tains image data the phone book may not be transferred correctly Image data can not be transferred from the cellular phone Depending on the cellular phone phone book transfer may not be available buluoud 321j spuepH Huis Chapter ED Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions A CAUTION For safety reasons you cannot use some of these navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo tion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22 Entering Settings Menu 1 Press MENU button to display the navi gation men
16. 2 Distance to the destination 3 Travel time to destination 4 Set the displayed route Sets the displayed route as your route and starts the route guidance gt For details refer to When the route guidance starts on the next page Display multiple routes You can select a desired route trom multiple route options Calculated routes are shown in different colors Touching iE to GEE switch to another route Touching OK returns to the previous display If you set waypoints you cannot use the multi ple route option O There can be cases that the same route is displayed even when multiple routes are searched O In multiple route calculations both routes that use and avoid the freeways are calculated independently of the set ting for Avoid Freeway 6 Change the route calculation condition Modity each calculation condition and recal culate the route gt For details refer to Modifying the Route Cal culation Conditions on page 34 D View the route profile Chapter Basic Operation CH You can check the streets that you will travel to reach the destination gt For details refer to Checking the passing streets with a list on page 35 Check the shape of route You can check the overall shape of your route and the location of destination on the map gt For details refer to Checking the entire route overview on the map on page 36 9 Adding and edit waypoint You can add remove or sort waypo
17. 24 Suggested lane information The traveling direction screen is displayed when you approach a interchange junction or exit The suggested lane is indicated with a green arrow Roads without turn by turn instructions Routable roads the route displayed and high lighted in purple have only basic data and can only be used to plot a navigable route Pioneer Navigation will only display a navig able route on the map only the arrival gui dance for the destination or a waypoint is available Please review and obey all local traf fic rules along the highlighted route For your safety No turn by turn directions will be displayed on these roads When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of this road the icon will be displayed beside the direction arrow indicating that the gui dance is not available with this type of road The icon q will be indicated for roads that have available guidance The Close up of intersection function Auto Re route function Changing the view to Guide Mode or Route View are not available Changing the scale of the map Touching amp or amp allows you to change the map scale Touch and holding amp or amp allows you to change the scale in smaller step within a range of 25 yards to 1000 miles 25 meters to 2000 kilometers When the view mode is set to Map Mode or Guide Mode Direct scale key is displayed Touching Direct scale key changes the map to the selected
18. Call Telephone Book gt lt Registered phone book s pronunciation gt gt If the registered entry in phone book has telephone number data touch VOICE icon to call the entry Call Call Registered Point gt lt Registered location s pronunciation gt f the registered location has telephone number data touch VOICE icon to call the registered location Call gt Redial gt Touch VOICE icon to redial Call Call Phone Number gt Say the number you want to call gt Touch VOICE icon to dial Note 1 Call Received Call gt Displaying the received call list Call Call Favorite X gt Touch VOICE icon to dial En Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 18 Call gt Call Home Touch VOICE icon to call your home Only when the phone number is registered in your home Call Call lt Registered location s pronunciation gt f the registered location has telephone number data touch VOICE icon to call the registered location Note 1 International call with using is not available in the voice operation Voice commands related to AV operation The following verbal commands can be used both in navigation screen and audio operation n O GD D 5 Common AV commands AV Operation Change Display Navigation Screen gt Switching to the navigation map or menu screen AV Operation Change Display AV Screen Switchi
19. O Recording or copying to the music library is not possible from recording media such as CD Rs in which a CD or other data is di gitally stored This is due to the Serial Copy Management System SCMS that was de veloped to prevent second generation or se rial copies O Recording to the music library is not possi ble from media Such as CD Rs in which MP3 files are stored O When you are recording a CD with no track intervals Such as a live concert CD if the engine stops and the power turns off the sound may break in a track when the music data is played back En Also see Notes for Hard Disk Drive for more cautions about handling hard disk drive For details refer to Notes for Hard Disk Drive on page 24 Music Library Play You can play back or edit the tracks recorded in the hard disk drive in the source named music library LIBRARY Selecting LIBRARY as the source Touch the source icon and touch LIBRARY gt For details refer to Selecting a source on page 97 Screen configuration Music Library LIBRARY i ll Eye lo oyo D3 integr ahon r 0d PREMER j 2 0 Briliance Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Group name indicator Shows the group currently playing 3 Playlist name indicator Shows the playlist currently playing 4 Track indicator Shows the number and title of the track cur rently playing Playback method indicator Shows
20. Relationship of groups playlists and tracks refer to Screen configuration on page 112 Chapter Using the AV Source Music Library 13 Searching for an album Select a playlist formed by an album and play it back 1 Touch Search The group selection screen appears 2 Touch Albums 1 sound vison soul E i Brive it Artists Gros My Faverihes 3 Touch the album name Album play list you want to play back Di sound vison soul a a Ot Grivel T PWWEER TiWE ede r QO Search at T at at Filla oe DI soundvision 7 m H Th world 5 dirs EL 7 Comming pone ation Mo od 0801 0 TEs Pro ji 7 N elf Actas guide l AV Sottinns The first track in the selected playlist is played back Searching the playlist by artist Select a playlist formed by an artist and play it back 14 Touch Search The group selection screen appears 2 Touch Artists Artist playlist appears 3 Touch the artist name Artist playlist you want to play back E Cele 5J MI soundvioncoul ue T PIONEER TIME amp 03 05 m Di Grivel T agia OL sparen 23 coll 2 PUOHEER TIME i ol Usung hero 8 0d Zeta 2 The first track in the selected playlist is played back Search a playlist by genre Select a playlist formed by a genre and play it back O Only the genre of a recorded track is dis played in a genre playlist 14 Touc
21. T Peak Hold Roset a Adjust Look You can select the following items Voltage Displays the power supply and voltage sup plied from the battery to this system Acceleration Acceleration in a forward direction is dis played The sign indicates acceleration while the sign indicates deceleration Side Acceleration Acceleration in a side direction such as when turning is displayed The sign indicates a right turn while the sign indicates a left turn Angular Velocity Displays the vehicle s turning angle over one second how far it has turned in a second Slope Displays the vehicle s vertical movement side represents the rising angle and side the falling angle Direction C16 En Displays the direction your vehicle is traveling In Clock Current time is displayed Adjust Look Touch Adjust Look to display a screen for se lecting the panel pattern Touch one of the pat terns from among those displayed on screen to change the panel to the selected pattern O Ifyou touch Peak Hold Reset the maxi mum and minimum green line values indi cated in Acceleration and Side Acceleration are reset You cannot change the speedometer at the center Selecting Demo Mode in the Settings menu enables you to perform a demonstra tion with random values Chapter Using Hands free Phoning dH Hands free Phoning Overview A CAUTION For your safety
22. Track Repeat the repeat play range changes to Disc Repeat Scan play current disc or the first track of each disc are played Indicator Implication The beginning of the first tracks of each disc is played for about 10 seconds Scan only The beginning of each track in the selected disc is played for about 10 seconds Disc Repeat and Scan O When you find the desired track or disc touch gil to turn scan play off O After track or disc scanning is finished normal playback of the tracks will begin again J Operating the iPod You can control an iPod by combining the Pioneer Interface adapter for iPod sold sepa rately to the navigation system For details concerning operation refer to the owner s manual of the Interface adapter for iPod This section provides information on iPod opera tions with the navigation system that differ from those described in the owner s manual of Interface adapter for iPod O When you use the iPod sold separately with this Navigation System Pioneer Inter face adapter for iPod is required iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc regis tered in the U S and other countries Selecting iPod as the source Touch the source icon and touch iPod gt For details refer to Selecting a source on page 97 Chapter Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV 15 Screen configuration M Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Song number in
23. from the end of the text Continuing to touch Use to see the next page or previous page the button deletes all of the text of the list Back G State list Returns you to the previous screen Press one of these items to set it as search area 5 Input the house number and touch Back OK Returns previous screen Touch the characters you want to input I You can also input a prefix to the house number Operation of street name or city name Touching OK with no input allows you to input screen e g QWERTY keyboard specify and search for the name of the street city or area first 6 Input the street name When the options are narrowed down to six or less a list of the matching streets automati cally appears When you enter the same characters that were entered previously the system automati cally displays the characters that follow the en tered characters Auto fill in function State code key Chapter KD Basic Operation Jump to the state selection screen Se lected state code is displayed 2 OK Confirms the characters displayed in and proceeds to the next step 3 List Lists candidates based on yellow characters in Touch the desired item item in the list to proceed to the next step 4 Text box Displays the characters that are entered Keyboard Use to enter the text 6 Back Returns previous screen Eze Deletes the input text one letter at a
24. gt For details refer to Editing Waypoints on page 36 9 Touch OK to decide your route Dk Multiple Route Oetions n Proto MET Wi ory pou Checking and modifying the route You can check the route details You can also recalculate the route in different conditions Route confirmation screen a Multiple Route G Route calculation condition Shows the route has been calculated under those conditions shows that fastest route is prioritized shows that shortest route is priori tized shows that using highways and main roads are prioritized F shows whether the suggested route includes freeways e EJE shows whether the suggested route includes toll roads The current setting appears IEH shows whether the suggested route includes ferries The current set ting appears HE shows whether the suggested route includes learning routes The cur rent setting appears In addition if the calculated route has unin tended results the following icons will be shown 32 En e fri shows that freeways could not be avoided shows that toll roads could not be avoided when the setting Avoid Toll Road is On e Fi shows that ferries could not be avoided when the setting Avoid Ferry is On e Fi shows for routes that contain streets or bridges that are subject to traffic reg ulations during a certain time when the setting Time restrictions is On
25. i actor s aJil i z See F Music Studio O Living Room setting that emphasizes mid range sound hardly has any effect near the maximum volume level 144 En 1 When you set staging to an option other than Off the high pass filter HPF setting turns Off gt For details refer to Using the high pass filter on page 146 Adjusting a position effect You can select a listener position that you want to make as the center of sound effects 1 Touch Staging in Audio Settings menu 2 Touch Position 3 Touch desired position Using balance adjustment You can select a fader balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats 1 Touch FAD BAL in Audio Settings menu The FAD BAL screen appears When Rear SP the subwoofer controller setting in System Settings menu is Sub W Balance will be displayed instead of FAD BAL gt For details refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 152 2 Touch A or Y to adjust front rear speaker balance Each time you touch A or W moves the front rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Front 15 to Rear 15 is displayed as the front rear speaker balance moves from front to rear When the rear output setting is Rear SP Sub W you cannot adjust front rear speaker balance gt For details refer to Setting the rear outp
26. rear view camera images are dis menu When you move the shift lever to a po played When MIRROR is selected sition other than R the screen will be re in REAR SCREEN menu turned to the previous display DVD V Setup is carried out You can not display the video image to Rear display during DVD V Setup menu gt Nothing is displayed and the The setting for the rear view camera Connect a rear view camera correctly 3 touch panel keys cannot be is incorrect used The shift lever was placed in R Press AV button to return to the source dis Q when the rear view camera was not play and then select the correct polarity set S connected ting for Camera Input Page 149 The back light of the LCD panel is Press V button to turn on the back light turned off Touch panel key is not respond Touch panel keys deviate from the Perform the touch panel calibration Page or a different key is responding actual positions that respond to 190 your touch for some reason CD recording is not possible A disc that cannot be recorded A disc other than a normal music CD cannot such as MP3 disc or DVD video is be recorded inserted CD recording doesn t stop Music Library recording will be can Wait until the current track has ended or though the record progress indi celed after playback of the current change the source manually cator shows 100 track is finished The recording mode stops at the interval of the tra
27. river s View z Mis Mode Wve Mode Wi view de cee O Rear View Back Mb Twin Map En twin Map M vohicio M igw Dynamics mi CS Wide variety of facility information for Points of Interest POI Search You can search for your destination from all areas e Approximately 12 million POIs are included in the database e Some POI information may not be accurate or may become inaccurate through the passage of time Please contact the POI di rectly to verify the accuracy of the informa tion about the POI that appears in this database POI information is subject to change without notice Auto reroute function If you deviate from the set route the system will re calculate the route from that point so that you remain on track to the destination O This function may not work in certain areas Auto CD title and MP3 file listing Title lists are automatically displayed when a CD or MP3 disc is played This system pro vides easy to operate audio functions that allow playback simply by selecting an item from the list Compatible voice recognition system Connecting the supplied microphone will en able voice operation for both the navigation and AV functions Original image assignment You can store your own pictures on a CD R in JPEG format and import original images in this navigation system These imported images can be set as a background or splash screen or as a picture in an address book or phone book ent
28. tory data 86 En Editing data 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Dialed Numbers or Received Calls 3 Touch 3 The edit screen appears Steps after this are the same as for editing the phone book gt For details reter to Editing the entry in Phone Book on page 84 M The phone number cannot be edited if it is already registered in the phone book Deleting data 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Dialed Numbers or Received Calls 3 Touch Delete 4 Touch Yes All history data is deleted and the current lo cation screen appears O To cancel the deletion touch No Notes for hands free phoning General notes e Connection to all cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar anteed e The line of sight distance between this na vigation system and your cellular phone must be 10 meters or less when sending and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth technology However the transmission dis tance may become shorter than the esti mated distance depending on the environment in use Chapter Using Hands free Phoning dH e You cannot delete a registered cellular About received call history and dialed phone If you need to delete it refer to Re number history turning the Navigation System to the De e Calls made or editing performed only on fault or Factory Setti
29. 1 Play back the track you want to regis ter 2 Touch gE then touch Add to My Favorites 116 En 3 Touch the playlist My Favorite 1 to My Favorite 4 or My Mix in which you want to register the track Add Tracks to Playlist Drive it Picase solect playlist to add track tz al Sgr My Mix 2 oF My Favoriie d oe lS My Favorite 2 ed My Favorite 3 5 05 My Favoriie d 4 Touch Yes The track is registered in the selected My Fa vorite playlist Registering multiple tracks at a time 1 Play back the playlist that contains the tracks you want to register 2 Touch to display the list of play lists 3 Touch gE then touch Add to My Favorites The item displayed in blue is the selected play list 4 Touch the playlist My Favorite 1 to My Favorite 4 or My Mix in which you want to register the tracks 5 Touch the tracks you want to register When you touch a track a check mark ap pears Indicating that it is selected To deselect it touch the track again Touch gt to proceed to the next operation TMi Tracks la Playin Gama vison sod Please solect playlist to add track tn E l Wy ioe 2 DZ iy Favoriic 4 E ods My Favorite 2 CE ds My Favorite 3 a 05 ty Favori 4 Chapter Using the AV Source Music Library 13 gt For details refer to Operating the track edit mode on the next page 4 Touch Back to return the previous screen SelectAll AIL
30. Chapter Modifying Map Configurations 05 na i e View Displays the voice guidance mute key on the map e Hide Hides the voice guidance mute key on the map Show Traffic Incident Selects whether to display or hide the traffic notification icons on the map when incidents occur on your route gt For details refer to Checking traffic informa tion manually on page 68 e View Displays the icons on the map e Hide Hides the icons on the map O The notification icons will not be avail able when your vehicle deviates from the route Second Maneuver Arrow Selects whether to display or hide the second turn ahead of the vehicle on the map except for Route View gt For details refer to How to view the map of the current location on page 38 e View Displays the second turn ahead of the vehi cle on the map e Hide Hides the second turn ahead of the vehicle on the map Bluetooth Connected Selects whether to display or hide the icon for current status of the phone connection via Bluetooth wireless technology e View Displays the Bluetooth Connected icon on the map e Hide Hides the Bluetooth Connected icon on the map gt For more details about Bluetooth Con nected icon refer to How to view the map of the current location on page 38 Address Book Icon You can select whether to display the Address Book Icon on the map e On Displays the Address Book Icon on the map
31. Major Ordinary Rond 45 kph Frerway 1 BD kph Ol The estimated time of arrival is not necessa rily estimated based on this speed value Checking the Setting Related with Hardware The hardware status including the driving sta tus of a vehicle positioning status by satellite learning status of the 3D sensor and cable connection status can be checked 90 En Checking the connections of leads and installation positions Check that leads are properly connected be tween the navigation system and the vehicle Please also check whether they are connected in the correct positions 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Hardware 2 Touch Connection Status The Connection Status screen appears Connection Status Seed Pulse GPS Antenna Phone Connechon Status Installation Position Parking Brake Power Yollage ilire bor Back Signal 1 Speed Pulse The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi gation system is shown 0 is shown while the vehicle is stationary 2 GPS Antenna Indicates the connection status of the GPS antenna the reception sensitivity and trom how many satellites the signal is received It the signal is received correctly OK is dis played If reception is poor NOK appears In such case please change the installation position of the GPS antenna 3 Phone Connection Status Indicates the connection status of the Blue tooth unit sold separately and
32. O If you say the category name category title the system searches for vicinity POIs in that category without taking the chain into consideration Category name Gas Station 76 ARCO BP AMOCO CHEVRON CITGO CLARK CONOCO ESSO EXXON FINA GETTY GULF MOBIL PETROCANADA PHILLIPS 66 SHELL SINCLAIR SU NOCO TEXACO ULTRAMAR Gas Station Others Category name Bank amp ATM BB amp T BANK OF AMERICA BANK OF MONTREAL BANK OF NEW YORK BANK OF NOVA SCOTIA CIBC BANK CITIBANK HSBC BANK USA J P MOR GAN CHASE KEY BANK LA SALLE BANK LAUREN TIAN BANK OF CANADA MELLON BANK NATIONAL BANK OF CANADA PNC BANK REGIONS BANK ROYAL BANK OF CANADA SUN TRUST BANK TD CANADA TRUST UNION BANK OF CALIFORNIA US BANK WACHOVIA BANK WASHINGTON MUTUAL WELLS FARGO BANK Bank amp ATM Others Category name Restaurant American Asian Barbecue Caf amp Espresso Chi nese Continental Creole Cajun French Greek In dian Italian Japanese Mexican Pizzeria Seafood Steak House Thai Restaurant Others Category name Fast Food Chains ARBY S AU BON PAIN BAJA FRESH BASKIN ROB BINS BOSTON MARKET BRAUM S ICE CREAM amp DAIRY BURGER KING CARL S JR CARVEL ICE CREAM BAKERY CHURCH S CHICKEN COLD STONE CREAMERY DAIRY QUEEN DUNKIN DO NUTS HAAGEN DAZS ICE CREAM HARDEE S HAR VEY S IN N OUT BURGER JACK IN THE BOX KFC LONG JOHN SILVER S MC DONALD S PANDA EX PRESS PICK UP STIX POPEYE S CHICKEN
33. OK to add to the waypoints You can add up to 5 waypoints in total 4 Touch OK A route is recalculated and Route confirma tion screen appears gt For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 O If you set waypoints in the route to your des tination the route up to the next waypoint will appear in light green The rest of the route will appear in light blue Chapter Basic Operation CH Deleting a waypoint You can delete waypoints from the route and then recalculate the route You can delete waypoints successively 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview 2 Touch Waypoints The waypoint menu screen appears 3 Touch Delete then touch the way point you want to delete The touched waypoint will be deleted from the list 4 Touch OK The route is recalculated and Route confir mation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 Sorting waypoints You can sort waypoints and recalculate the route 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview 2 Touch Waypoints The waypoint menu screen appears 3 Touch Sort then touch Automatic or Manual A Waypoint List Automatic T Manual f hell 5 Sort Mis i Automatic You can sort the destination and waypoints automatically The system will show the near est waypo
34. RW is displayed O Touching an option other than Import from Disc allows you to select an image stored on the hard disk drive 3 Touch a picture you want to set O To cancel displaying the picture select No Picture 4 Touch Yes On this screen you can select the following items No Select when you want to change to another picture Return to Step 3 Selecting sound No sounds can be output during iKa 1 Touch Sound 2 Select the desired sound C1 To turn off the sound select No Sound 3 Touch Sound to hear the sound 4 Touch Set Changing the position of locations 1 Touch Modify Location The map of the selected area and its surround ings appears 2 Touch the screen to change its position then touch OK E 1 m a a Deleting the entry in Address Book Items registered in Address Book can be de leted All entries of the data in Address Book can be deleted at once suo1 e907 Hulzipy pue Hulsa sibay 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Address Book 2 Touch Delete Delete from Address Book screen appears 3 Select the location you want to delete A check mark appears by the selected loca tion elete from Address Book COMASSET ST OFFICE ARB ARK fil EHDALE PASADE BURBANK EXDALE FASARE LEMP AVE oH BOSE ST TE A al 4 KEKI Chapter Registering and Editing Locations On this sc
35. The selected entry is registered in the corre sponding Dial Favorites Editing the entry in Phone Book You can edit the imported phone book data or add new data You can edit Name Pronun ciation Phone or Picture You can also delete unnecessary data O The data cannot be transferred back to the cellular phone Editing data or adding new data 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Phone Book 3 Touch or Add The edit screen appears O To add data by entering it as desired touch Add Chapter Using Hands free Phoning dH 4 Select the entry you want to edit Phone Book Record Edi M Name Enter the name to be displayed in the pohone book For more details about operations please read the following page gt For details refer to Changing a name on page 61 O Up to 40 characters can be input for the name 2 Pronunciation You can enter the desired pronunciation in dependently from the name The registered pronunciation is used for voice recognition For more details about operations please read the following page gt For details refer to Changing a pronuncia tion on page 62 T Up to 40 characters can be input for the pronunciation T If nothing is entered in a text box you cannot use that item as a voice com mand O Depending on which language is being switched to you may not be able to use the registere
36. This icon indicates that this name can be used as a voice command during voice opera tion O You cannot change the name of your home Changing a pronunciation No sounds can be output during gm 1 Touch Pronunciation 2 Enter anew pronunciation then touch OK The current pronunciation appears in the text box if already set Delete the current pronun ciation and enter a new pronunciation be tween 1 and 23 characters long 3 If the pronunciation is suitable touch Yes The details you set are registered and the Ad dress Book menu appears Alternative options No Cancels the editing Repeat You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the name you entered O Ifthe pronunciation is not the desired one edit the characters so that the pronuncia tion matches your desired pronunciation O When you confirm the pronunciation W is shown on the left side of the location name displayed in the Address Book menu This mark indicates that this name can be used as a voice command during voice opera tion 62 En O You cannot change the pronunciation of your home O If nothing is entered in the text box you cannot use that item as the voice com mands Entering or changing a phone number 1 Touch Phone 2 Input a phone number then touch OK The Address Information menu appears O To change a registered phone number de lete the existing number and then enter a new one Selecting an icon to
37. To turn local seek tuning off touch Off 3 Touch lt or gt to set the sensitivity There are two levels of sensitivity for AM Level 1 2 The level 2 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations while lower settings let you receive weaker stations En Chapter olpey pue ana GAG UI 1Ng a24n0S AY a4 Bursn 3 Chapter ED Using the AV Source Music Library You can record tracks from a music CD to the hard disk in the navigation system The music library function enables you to record music CDs on the hard disk in the navigation system and play them back with various methods To use the music library start by recording sound sources from the CD Music Library Recording When you play back a music CD that is not re corded on the navigation system the system automatically begins recording that CD to the music library This section describes cautions and recording procedure O The music library can record up to 200 gen eral music CDs worth of music data This is just an average number and varies de pending on the size of music data con tained in the CDs Screen configuration O2 Eyo lo oye 0 integration 100 appears to indicate that the recording has completed You can touch Stop to switch the screen and perform another operation Recording mode indicator Shows the current recording mode gt For details refer to Setting the CD recording mo
38. Using balance adjustment 144 Using subwoofer output 145 Using non fading output 145 Adjusting loudness 145 Using the high pass filter 146 Adjusting source levels 146 Customizing the System Settings Items 146 How to view and operate the System Settings 146 Setting up the built in DVD drive 147 Setting the parental lock 148 Changing the wide screen mode 149 Setting for rear view camera 149 Setting the video input 150 Switching the auxiliary setting 150 C6 En Switching the muting attenuation timing 150 Switching the muting attenuation level 151 Changing the voice output of the navigation guidance 151 Switching the auto antenna setting 151 Setting the clock display on the video image 151 Setting the CD recording mode 152 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 152 Switching the 5 1ch setting 152 Other Functions 153 Selecting the video for Rear display 153 Operating the picture adjustment 153 Switching the backlight on or off 154 Language Code Chart for DVD 155 18 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice To Ensure Safe Driving 156 Basics of Voice Operation 156 Flow of voice operation 156 To start voice operation 156 Tips for Voice Operation 157 An Example of Voice Operation 158 Search for POI in vicinity 158 Search for the playlist 159 Available Voice Commands 159 Basic commands f
39. Weather channel even from a source other than the XM source O To cancel the announcement touch TRFC Off on the screen or press T button again m Operating the SIRIUS Satellite Radio You can use the navigation system to control a SiriusConnect universal tuner which is sold separately This section provides information on SIRIUS operations with the navigation sys tem which differs from that described in the SiriusConnect universal tuner s operation manual O When you use the SiriusConnect universal tuner sold separately with this Navigation System Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is required For details concerning operation refer to the owner s manual of Pioneer SIR IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect universal tuner O The following function is not available if this navigation system is connected to the Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE CD SB10 and the SiriusConnect universal tuner Using Instant Replay function O The following functions are not available in SIR PNR1 Selecting team for game alert Displaying game information Using the song alert function Using the direct traffic announcement function SNIMIS INX 224NOS AY 34 Huish Chapter ED Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS Selecting SIRIUS as the source Touch the source icon and touch SIRIUS gt For details refer to Se ecting a source on page 97 Screen configuration oe Y SIRIUSA SATELLITE EADIG
40. amp BIS CUITS QUIZNOS RUBIO S SECOND CUP SONIC STARBUCK S COFFEE SUBWAY SANDWICHES amp SALADS TACO BELL TACO JOHN S TCBY TIM HOR TON S TJ CINNAMONS TOGO S WENDY S WHATA BURGER 172 En Category name Restaurant Chains A amp W FAMILY RESTAURANT APPLEBEE S BENNI GAN S BOB S BIG BOY BONANZA BONEFISH GRILL CARRABBA S ITALIAN GRILL CHILI S GRILL amp BAR GHUCK E CHEESE PIZZA CLAIM JUMPER COCO S DOMINO S PIZZA FAZOLI S GODFATHER S PIZZA GOLDEN CORRAL FAMILY STEAK HSE IHOP RESTAURANT KELSEYS LITTLE CAESARS PIZZA LONE STAR STEAKHOUSE MARIE CALLENDER OLIVE GARDEN ITALIAN RSTRNT OUTBACK STEAK HOUSE PAPA JOHN S PIZZA PASTA CONNECTION PERKINS FAMILY RESTAURANT PIZZA HUT PON DEROSA STEAK HOUSE RED LOBSTER ROUND TABLE PIZZA RUBY TUESDAY SHAKEY S PIZZA SIZ ZLER SMOKEY BONES STEAK amp ALE SWISS CHA LET TGI FRIDAY S THE KEG Category name Supermarkets ACME ALBERTSONS ALDI A amp P BI LO CUB FOODS CUMBERLAND FARMS FOOD LION GIANT GIANT EAGLE H E B HY VEE IGA JEWEL OSCO KROGER MEIJER PANTRY PATHMARK PIGGLY WIGGLY PUBLIX RALEY S RALPH S SAFEWAY SAVE A LOT SHAW S SUPERMARKET STOP amp SHOP STOP N GO TOPS FRIENDLY MARKET VON S WHOLE FOODS WINN DIXIE Supermarkets Others Category name Automotive AAA RV Truck Facility Automobile Club Parking Car Parts amp Accessories Car Repair Facility Car Wash Category name
41. e Off Hides the Address Book Icon on the map O Even if Address Book Icon is set to Off the alarm sounds when you ap proach the registered location and the set image pops up To turn off the sound output and image pop up select No Sound and No Picture for the entry gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Address Book on page 60 3D Landmark You can select whether to display the 3D Land mark on the map O 3D Landmark only appears when the view mode is 3D Twin Map View and the map scale is set to 0 25 mile 200 m or lower e On Displays the 3D Landmark on the map e Off Hides the 3D Landmark on the map m suo1 eIn zuo dew bulAjipow Chapter KD Modifying Map Configurations Selecting the Shortcut Select shortcuts to display on the map screen In the list displayed on screen the items with red checks are displayed on the map screen Touch the shortcut you want to display and then touch OK when a red check appears You can select up to five shortcuts 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then touch Short Cut Selection The Short Cut Selection screen appears ad pr F Wa Roger ation 2 Vicuely Search i ij Dhar Lry Pal an Volume B Phone Book Ve Pial Favorite On this screen you can operate the following items 2 Touch the item that you want to set in the shortcut menu An item with a red check mark is displayed in the shortc
42. the screen displays category search Touch and hold Storing broadcast sta tions You can register the channel currently being broadcast to the preset list Chapter Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS 14 O Upto 18 stations 6 for each of three SIRIUS bands can be stored in memory 2 Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one ata time o Ifyou keep touching KERSE or EJ you can skip broadcasting channels O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 3 Switch the SIRIUS display Each touch of DISP changes the display information Channel number Channel name Channel category Artist name teature Song program title Composer Touch and hold to switch ON OFF the in formation scroll 4 Switch the SIRIUS channel select mode You can switch the mode between the two methods for selecting and listing the chan nel All Ch Mode You can select a channel from all channels when you operate Category Mode You can select a channel within selected ca tegory when you operate Select a SIRIUS band Touch Band repeatedly until the desired SIRIUS band is displayed SIRIUS 1 SIRIUS 2 or SIRIUS 3 This is useful for switching the preset 6 Switch the touch panel keys to next page D Select team for game alert You can register your favorite team gt For details refer to Se ecting teams for Game Alert on this page gt For details refer to
43. vty mobile nhonel O01262B2F7FB My mobile phonel 00126262F TFE O If registration fails repeat the procedure trom the beginning If a connection still cannot be established try connecting using your cellular phone Operating from your cellular phone 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your cellular phone For some cellular phones no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech nology For details refer to the instruction manual of your cellular phone 2 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 3 Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen appears 4 Touch Registration Phone Settings Connection Registration PIONEER HOO WAY Password onan OK Devica Name 5 Touch Mobile The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth wireless technology connection 6 Operate your cellular phone to register the navigation system If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass word enter the password of the navigation system After the registration is completed the follow ing screen appears O If registration fails repeat the procedure from the beginning Connecting a registered cellular phone The navigation system automatically connects the cellular phone selected as a target of con nection However connect the cellular phone manually in the following cases e Two or more cellular phones are registered and you wa
44. 112 Also see at Handling and Care of the Disc in the hardware manual and Detail Infor mation for Playable Media on page 199 for more cautions about handling each type of media Screen configuration DO me OT Drive at O2 Eye b oye D3 integration od PREMER lH Brilliance Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the disc currently playing when available 3 Playback method indicator 100 En Shows which playback method has been se lected 4 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track currently play ing Track title indicator Shows the title of the track currently playing when available Artist name indicator Shows the name of the artist currently play ing when available D Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track Track list Shows tracks of the CD currently playing Title display Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com O Title information will be displayed when the information is found in the Gracenote Da tabase on the built in hard disk drive If you insert a CD TEXT disc the system priori tizes the title information encoded in CD TEXT disc Some discs have text information en c
45. 144 SINGIEZSES SION setoiat ears a decease 95 SIOWFMOTONS play OAC K raaa a 105 Oe EA A EE EEEE E T 97 SECON PULSE hiari a A 90 91 194 Speed pulse generator vce 192 194 SO SEE EE EE E EE 93 95 Steering REMOTE Control scarsie 78 98 156 Seer St OCEN ea AAA 31 Street name or city name input screen 29 VUS e a a a amin ten te cto 191 DUB WOOTEK aiast aa a 146 152 A 3 0 Geen enters terre tren tener err nrne rte 30 TEATS LSI EEE E E E T 89 LSS TESTON aa a RAE 35 Touch Panel Calibration sernresirneraceienn 190 ME ea EEE 198 MACKA DSa a E ENE S 46 EA E EE ARENE AES 42 UES SVS UGCA a A e Ta 207 U Unit of distance and Speed seniade 89 VIDS E A E ETE EE E aint 104 208 venele Lynarnriics ISDIAY siate hane 716 WAC COMME C3 Sih iets shuts Giatind tae a aE 10 VON TINO CS asst ataitededanaciica shania E 38 VOICE COMMAS aiee ARR 159 VOTE CTT CHO MCT scans hates indents tutta bors WV iejleisuO els ac ilo am eee a on ent enn 156 DOTTIE oiss ecu seta eaadece tata oes wads NAAN 88 w WADO aE 41 WANDO O Svea dicen ase itso N AEN 36 wee SCKECIT IMOCE A Aa 149 Register your product at http www pioneerelectronics com in Canada Http www pioneerelectronics ca See Visit our website page PIONEER CORPORATION 4 1 MEGURO 1 CHOME MEGURO KU TOKYO 153 8654 JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC P O Box 1540 Long Beach California 90801 1540 U S A TEL 800 421 1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087
46. 2 Insert the CD you want to record Recording automatically starts for the first track When recording finishes the system returns to the normal playback screen of the CD in the end of the track O To cancel the recording touch Stop Stopping CD recording You can stop recording while recording a CD Recording can resume depending on the re cording mode Touch Stop When REC Mode is Auto or Single Aseiqry DIsniAl anos AY y Buisn Chapter ED Using the AV Source Music Library 412 Recording is paused and the system starts normal CD playback To resume recording touch REC Recording also resumes in the following cases e When you switch to another source and then return to the CD source e When you turn off the ignition switch of the vehicle and then restart the engine When REC Mode is Manual Recording is stopped Touch REC to record the track being played Notes on CD recording O Operations on the navigation system may take more time during recording than nor mal O Tracks from a CD are recorded in 4 times speed You can listen to that sound during recording O The data is recorded using a highly efficient compression method so the sound may slightly differ from the original depending on the sound source Noise may be heard in some cases but this is not an malfunc tion O Recording is possible only with a CD that contains 44 1 kHz 16 bit stereo PCM digital audio data
47. E Faty Select Ockail Prack if Select All Selects all detailed categories that are in cluded in that category E g all categories of restaurants including Japanese and fast food Deselect All Deselects the selected categories 4 Touch the desired detailed category Previously set categories will have a red check mark 5 Touch Back Returns to the previous screen 6 Repeat Step 2 to 5 to select a category You can select up to 100 items from the de tailed categories 7 Touch OK The POI in the selected category and subcate gory are searched 54 En Names of POls and their distance from your current location appear They are listed in order from nearest to farthest To the left of each item is an icon indicating the category teen earlier gual Vieinity Search er a US POST OFFICE am we Eus PosT cFFIe hus post 0F Fe Bus rost cerce Bus post cerice Ta Eus post orrice Distance to the facility 8 Touch the desired POI to set your desti nation When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately gt For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 When the route is already set Location confir mation screen is shown gt For details refer to Calculating your destina tion by using Address Search on page 28 O When you touch amp the POIs around the specified location are shown on a map Searching for the facilities around
48. Enter the track edit mode gt For details refer to Switching to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch Sort Tracklists 3 Touch the track that you want to change 4 Touchy M F or hj to determine the po sition you want to put 5 Touch the selected track again The destination is fixed 6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the playback order of other tracks 7 Touch ESC The new order is fixed and the system returns to the normal playback screen Deleting a playlist You can delete a playlist in Albums group You cannot delete playlists in other groups O If you delete a playlist in Albums group all tracks in the playlist are deleted from the hard disk drive They are deleted from My Favorites group at the same time O If you delete the playlist the system does not delete the edited title information such as album title artist name or track name 1 Enter the playlist edit mode gt For details refer to Switching to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch Delete This Playlist 3 Touch Yes The playlist is deleted Deleting a track from the playlist You can delete tracks trom the playlist O Ifyou delete a track in Albums group the track is deleted from the hard disk drive It is deleted from My Favorites group at the same time O If you delete the track the system does not delete the edited title information O If you delete the tracks in My Mix playlist or My Favorite p
49. For details refer to Switching to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch Genres 3 Select the desired genre from the list O01 Rock Pop 2 elt laz 2 3 Qassical 2 04 Hip Hp Rap 1 a05 Soul Urban The genre is changed and the system returns to the previous screen Assigning another candidate for title information If the current title information is not desired title you can search for another title informa tion from Gracenote Database in the hard disk drive manually and assign another candi date If there were multiple options for the title information you can select one title from them O Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Grace note is the industry standard in music re cognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com 122 Ep O Once you update the title information the information you edit before will be overwrit ten by the title information of the Grace note Database Gracenote Database updates are available You can download the latest update from Pioneer website by using your PC To install the update burn the data onto a CD R RW and insert it into your navigation system When you download the files and install the update fol low the instructions in the website 1 Select the playlist in Albums group and enter the playlist edit mode or track edit mode gt For details refer to Switchi
50. Information To ensure safe driving Parking brake interlock Certain functions Such as viewing of DVD video and certain touch panel key operations offered by this navigation system could be dangerous and or unlawful if used while driv ing To prevent such functions from being used while the vehicle is in motion there is an interlock system that senses when the parking brake is set and when the vehicle is moving It you attempt to use the functions described above while driving they will become disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the park ing brake A WARNING e To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the potential violation of applicable laws the navi gation system is not for use with a Video image that is visible to the driver e In some countries or states the viewing of Video image on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal Where such regulations apply they must be obeyed e When applying the parking brake in order to view Video image or to enable other func tions offered by the navigation system park your vehicle in a safe place and keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill or otherwise might move when releasing the parking brake 22 En A CAUTION Accuracy performance of interlock may be i
51. Keetberglaan 1 B 9120 Melsele Belgium TEL 0 3 570 05 11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE LTD 253 Alexandra Road 04 01 Singapore 159936 TEL 65 6472 7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 178 184 Boundary Road Braeside Victoria 3195 Australia TEL 03 9586 6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC 300 Allstate Parkway Markham Ontario L8R OP2 Canada TEL 1 877 283 5901 TEL 905 479 4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S A de C V Blvd Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico D F 11000 TEL 55 91 78 4270 SS AY A BRD E HAA GAH ALACER Ee 4 45 3H maa 02 2521 3588 KEET Be AAA FELES DE a FR Se PD 9 4901 6 8 an 0852 2848 6488 lt KSKZX gt lt 08F00000 gt Published by Pioneer Corporation Copyright 2008 by Pioneer Corporation All rights reserved Printed in China lt CRB2619 B U gt UC
52. Learning Rowla The route is recalculated and Route confir mation screen appears When a single route is calculated the system searches for the route that meets these condi tions as closely as possible O A single route is calculated in the following cases When a waypoint is set When a route is set through voice recogni tion When auto reroute is carried out 34 En Items that users can operate Settings marked with an asterisk show that these are default or factory settings Route Condition This setting controls how the route should be calculated by taking into account the time or the distance or the main road Determine which condition takes priority for route calculation Fast Calculate a route with the shortest travel time to your destination as a priority EN Short Calculate a route with the shortest distance to your destination as a priority Main Road Calculate a route that passes major arterial road as a priority Avoid Toll Road This setting controls whether toll roads in cluding toll areas should be taken into ac count Off Calculate a route that may include toll roads including toll areas ej On ing toll areas O The system may calculate a route that in cludes toll road even if On is selected Avoid Ferry This setting controls whether ferry crossings should be taken into account E Off culate a route that may include ferries
53. Pioneer grants to you a non transferable nonexclusive license to use the software in stalled on the Pioneer products the Soft ware and the related documentation solely for your own personal use or for internal use by your business only on such Pioneer products You shall not copy reverse engineer trans late port modify or make derivative works of the Software You shall not loan rent dis close publish sell assign lease subli cense market or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not ex pressly authorized by this agreement You shall not derive or attempt to derive the source code or structure of all or any portion of the Software by reverse engineering dis assembly decompilation or any other means You shall not use the Software to op erate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data for other persons or entities Pioneer and its licensor s shall retain all copyright trade secret patent and other proprietary ownership rights in the Soft ware The Software is copyrighted and may not be copied even if modified or merged with other products You shall not alter or re move any copyright notice or proprietary le gend contained in or on the Software You may transfer all of your license rights in the Software the related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to an other party provided that the party reads and agrees to accept the terms
54. Playback method indicator En 133 Chapter BET Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV 3 Touch Skip forward or backward The first 10 seconds of each track of the 134 En Touching gt skips to the start of the next track Touching ka once skips to the start of the current track Touching again will skip to the previous track Touch and hold fast backward or for ward Keep touching ka or gt gt I to perform fast backward or forward O You can also perform these operations by using TRK lt gt button 4 Play back the previous disc The disc before the currently played disc will be played Play back the next disc The disc after the currently played disc will be played 6 Repeat play Each touch of changes the settings as follows Track Repeat Repeat just the current track Disc Repeat Repeat the current disc O If you select other discs during repeat play the repeat play range setting will be canceled O If you perform track search or fast for ward rewind during Track Repeat the repeat play range changes to Disc Repeat Q Play tracks in random order Tracks will play in a random order within the previously selected repeat ranges Indicator Implication Tracks of all disc in the magazine are played in random order Random only Tracks in the selected disc are played in ran dom order Disc Repeat and Random O Ifyou perform random play during
55. S a A Seah e gigi Osere Mat i ia za J E N Mlay Lists ET a Albums Songs i ari al EAV Sotings i E Benes The search screen is displayed The icon on the left indicates that the item is a Playlist and the J icon indicates that the item is a Song T Ifyou select Songs proceed to step 4 T When you select Artists Albums or Genres you can start a playback of all songs in the selected list To do this keep touching the list title 3 Touch the title of the list that you want to play Repeat this operation until you find the de sired song 1 To return to the previous screen touch iE 136 En 4 From the song list touch the song you want to play T To go to the next page of the list touch M To return to the previous page of the list touch H C Operating the TV tuner A CAUTION For safety reasons visual images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view vi sual images you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route For details refer to 70 ensure safe driving on page 22 You can use the navigation system to control a TV tuner e g GEX P6400TV GEX P5700TV which is sold separately For details concern ing operation refer to the TV tuner s operation manual This section provides information on TV operations with the navigation system that differ from those described in the
56. Select a FM band Touch Band repeatedly until the desired FM band is displayed FM 1 FM 2 or FM 3 O This function is convenient to prepare different preset lists for each band m Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM best stations memory lets you auto matically store the six strongest broadcast fre quencies under preset tuning keys P1 P6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with a touch of the key Touch and hold BSM BSM starts The six strongest broadcast fre quencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 P6 in order of their signal strength To cancel the storage process touch Can cel Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 P6 Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception 1 Touch Local 2 Touch On to turn local seek tuning on O To turn local seek tuning off touch Off 3 Touch lt or gt to set the sensitivity There are four levels of sensitivity for FM Level 1 2 3 4 The level 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations while lower settings let you receive weaker stations 108 En Operating the Radio AM You can listen to the radio by using the naviga tion system This section describes operations f
57. Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 SIRIUS band indicator Shows the SIRIUS band which has been se lected 3 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator Shows what channel select mode has been selected You can select a channel from all channels in All Ch Mode and select a channel from the selected category in Category Mode gt For details refer to Switch the SIRIUS channel select mode on the next page 4 SIRIUS channel number indicator Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the tuner is tuned to Detail information Shows the detail information of the broad cast channel currently being received O The message ON THE AIR disappears if the navigation system cannot receive SIR IUS tuner reception for some reason gt For details refer to roubleshooting on page 174 En Touch panel key operation Touch the source icon and then touch SIRIUS to select the SIRIUS When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch panel keys Page 1 All Ch Mode rr I i SIRIUS SATELLITE RABI OH Trill Ain SIO SIRIU S SATELLITE TADIG Gri Trill Aan AERLE h SIRIU 2 Fh SATELLITE RABI Wi Trill Ain Items marked with an asterisk cannot be used on SIR PNR1 4 Touch Recalling channels from the pre set Touch to recall the preset channel In All Ch Mode you can also recall the preset channel by pressing the P LIST A F button 1 In Category Mode
58. TV tuner s operation manual When you attempt to watch visual images while driving the warning AT TENTION Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited will appear on the screen Selecting TV as the source Touch the source icon and touch TV gt For details refer to Selecting a source on page 97 Chapter Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV 15 Screen configuration Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to TV Torry 2 3 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected 4 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned to Preset list display Shows the preset list Touch panel key operation Touch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV tuner When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch panel keys Select channels from the list The list lets you see the list of channels and select one of them to view O Touching Hor M switches to the next or previous page in the list O You can register your favorite channels in the list gt For details refer to Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies on this page 2 Touch Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one step Touch and hold Perform seek tuning The tuner will scan the channels until a broadcast strong enough for good recep tion i
59. To change to the menu you want to use touch the name of the menu displayed at the top of the screen 3 If you want to return to the map press MENU button Chapter Basic Operation CH Navigation menu overview able for cities where information is provided by XM NavIrattic service Active subscription to XM NavlIratfic is required to receive traffic TB estate n information on the navigation system mee L l gt For details refer to Using XM NavTraffic Infor Address Return art POI Route mation on page 65 Search Herre icant Overview A bwa jy Aa gt For details refer to Emergency Info on Destination menu Drs sina Telestone ee page 12 no History tar stare BUTE O a bi lt ND BI1 a a A Sold separately Use for hands free phoning and business card transfer via Bluetooth tech You can search your destination in this menu uo e130d0 Jiseg You can also check or cancel your set route nology from this menu Map menu gt For more details about Specifying the ad m dress and searching for the destination refer Destinatirtze Information to Calculating your destination by using Ad ar La dress Search on the next page to Selection Pl For more details about Other search meth Day Ti Al ado Road Color ods refer to Chapter 6 Display Mode wf a T Buo Information menu You can change View Mode or set the Destinatie information TS
60. When voice command is possible When voice command is not accepted O When you say Voice Help the navigation system pronounces the displayed words that can be vocalized O If no VOICE icon is displayed check to see whether the microphone is properly con nected and turn the power on again O If there are multiple pages the voice help menu can be switched by using gg or MEMS on the screen You can also switch the page by saying Next page or Pre vious page O If you say Back or touch Back the screen returns to the previous screen To cancel voice operation You can cancel voice operation features at any time by saying Cancel After you cancel voice operation the map is displayed O If no command is made in the next 6 sec onds or the recognition fails three times successively the voice recognition switches to standby mode To reactivate voice operation touch VOICE icon Tips for Voice Operation For your voice commands to be correctly re cognized and interpreted ensure that condi tions are Suitable for recognition Reduce the volume setting on your vehicle audio system gt For details refer to Switching the muting at tenuation timing on page 150 Close the vehicle windows Please note that wind through the vehicle win dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the vehicle can interfere with voice operation Position the microphone carefully For optimum pick up the micropho
61. When you approach a registered location while traveling When a location with a registered sound effect and image comes within an approx 0 19 mile 300 m radius from the vehicle position the sound effect plays and the image appears E CLYBOURN AVE Changing a name No sounds can be output during ga 1 Touch Name then touch Yes The message confirming whether or not to register the entered name as voice command is displayed When not registering a name as a voice com mand select No 2 Enter anew name then touch OK Qihars Small The current name appears in the text box De lete the current name and enter anew name between 1 and 23 characters long O Touch Small to enter lowercase letters Touch Caps to enter uppercase letters Touch to toggle the selection 3 If the pronunciation is suitable touch Yes The details you set are registered and the Ad dress Book menu appears Alternative options No Completes the registration without editing the pronunciation Repeat suo1 e907 Hulzipy pue Hulsa sibay en 61 Chapter Registering and Editing Locations You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the name you entered O Ifthe pronunciation is not the desired one edit the characters so that the pronuncia tion matches your desired pronunciation O When you confirm the pronunciation W is shown on the left side of the location name displayed in Address Book menu
62. XM channel number the tuner is cur rently tuned to 4 XM station name indicator Shows XM broadcast station name the tuner is currently tuned to 5 XM channel select mode indicator Shows what channel select mode has been selected You can select a channel from all channels in All CH Mode and select a chan nel from selected category in Category Mode gt For details refer to Jouch panel key opera tion on the next page 6 XM channel category Shows the category of broadcast channel D XM station name logo O The message ON THE AIR disap pears if the navigation system cannot re ceive XM tuner reception for some reason SNIUIS INX 221Nnos AY 24 Huish En 123 Chapter ED Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS O Ifyou use GEX P910XM or GEX P900XM the logo for channel name is not avail able Detail information Shows the detailed information of the broad cast channel currently being received 9 Category icon Shows the category icon for the selected channel Touch panel key operation Touch the source icon and then touch XM to select the XM When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch panel keys GEX P10XMT GEX P920XM Page 1 All CH Mode RA wl hs aza fof Snow Patrol Page 1 Category Mode ited Ch O78 PoF Snow Patrol Mi Gh 028 Upor Run t Snow Patrol Touch panel keys GEX P910XM or GEX P900
63. aks 85 93 94 FEE sena e a ates 100 110 COET arent meee omt renee even a tenet cnn ete 83 CUM REIAT HOC EUIOMN sire n 33 D EAC TeckOnINO antan A 192 Default or Factory SettingS eresien 187 CMO IVI OCS cece criusaiely nae vial E E 95 Pes naton FOY erep n R sear 64 Dialbd number NISTO siei 81 Directscde Roy 2 th carota danaa 43 BEE AON AATE ETT ETE 92 BADOA a e tere Mercere rere 205 SS sae gies tae asta E E E 205 E Enlarged map of the IMtEersecti Nnnanspr 40 EUZ En E E 142 Estimated time of arnal ereriinasriiennat 42 Extena E TA 139 F Favore locato meneen aan 58 Frame by frame playback wcrc 105 PEON CL SDIAY Guta dedendsbsssen a e 197 FROG MOIS DIY ropan ai EA 10 G Gente oE er E ge GPS EEE EE tao A AI A 191 Gracenote Data EEE OERE T nieces 100 ATOT 113 122 GUIDES DOT cairn n 41 H Hando NCS ONONO zeroan a 86 Fands hee PRONN ahin e 11 Fera DSK EYE ia a late inadete anes 24 197 Far SK recordi Ng errs e e 100 Fe CUO UD e a A 41 Higi pas Eer seareiro a 146 POTC IOCALOM mre Es AA E 58 o DS TAG r E a N 103 206 Inactive touch panel key serrer 28 PVC OPN Call a enter tea ca gecse actus 80 MENUO gl0 lo mmrrrnrrerrn nee terete ter tyterr c 92 POG asses scape E E tae alta E SS 134 OHOO TOMIA srr 206 J BO e a S E ss 206 a l E A A A E E TT 95 K INC VOC GH gao Ea T eens 30 89 LanG nene ore a reren en reenter ier 88 147 Learno ROUTO sah ereaisdwink ae RAT 35 ESE AN EESE E EEEE E 91 Me rie E A E EE E
64. an extreme angle exceeding the limitation of the installation angle No data is available that can be used with the XM tuner The selected channel is not in cluded in your subscription Radio is being updated with the lat est encryption code Route calculation has failed be cause of a malfunction in map data software or hardware The destination is too far The destination or waypoint s are too close e The destination or waypoint s are in a Control Traffic Zone CTR and the route calculation is hampered e Your vehicle is currently in a Con trol Traffic Zone CTR and the route Contirm the installation angle The naviga tion system must be installed within the al lowed installation angle For details refer to Installation Manual Wait for a while and try the operation again Select another channel Wait until the encryption code is fully up dated e Change the destination e Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes sage persists e Set a destination closer to the starting point e Set one or more waypoints Set a destination and waypoint s farther from the starting point e Set a destination and waypoint s outside the CTR if you know where the restricted area IS e Try a destination or waypoint s away from the currently set points to some extent calculation is hampered The destination waypoint s or starting point are in an area where no road exists e g a moun
65. and condi tions of this License Agreement uoIpnpo u Chapter KD Introduction 2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY TION BREACH OF CONTRACT BREACH OF The Software and related documentation are provided to you AS IS PIONEER AND ITS LICENSOR S for the purpose of provi sions 2 and 3 Pioneer and its licensor s shall be collectively referred to as Pioneer MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFT WARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IM PLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EX CLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU The Software is complex and may contain some noncontormities defects or errors Pioneer does not warrant that the Software will meet your needs or expectations that operation of the Software will be error free or uninter rupted or that all non conformities can or will be corrected Furthermore Pioneer does not make any representations or warranties regarding the use or results of the use of the Software in terms of its accuracy relia bility or otherwise LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CLAIM OR LOSS IN CURRED BY YOU INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION COMPENSATORY INCIDEN TAL INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUEN TIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES LOST PROFITS LOST INCOME LOST SALES OR BUSINESS EXPENDITURES INVEST ME
66. appear on the map O Selects whether to display or hide all of the registered location icons on the map gt For details refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46 1 Touch Icon 2 Touch the icon that you want to appear on the map The Address Information menu appears You cannot change the icon of your home and your favorite location T Ifyou set gM dot the registered name of that entry can be displayed on the map The registered name does not appear if Ad dress Book Icon is set to Off Chapter Registering and Editing Locations Customizing the picture Be sure to read Limitations for importing pic tures before creating a CD R RW gt For details refer to Limitations for importing pictures on page 94 You can customize a picture for the Address Book entry Some pictures are already stored in the hard disk drive and you can also import JPEG format pictures such as a picture from your digital camera by using a CD R RW You can use pictures by burning them onto a CD R RW with your PC and inserting it into the navigation system Here a method for changing the picture is de scribed with an example of loading a picture stored on a CD R RW onto the navigation system 1 Check that no disc is inserted and in sert your CD R RW to the disc loading slot 2 Touch Picture and then touch Import from Disc The list of the pictures stored in the CD R
67. be deleted A red check appears on the selected shortcut All None A red check will appear or disappear on all re gistered categories 5 Touch Delete Deletes the selected shortcut from the list UO1 EUI S9G Inoa 0 3 NOY e 6ul 9S Chapter Registering and Editing Locations A CAUTION For safety reasons you Cannot use some of these navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo tion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22 Registering Locations Overview Registering places you visit frequently saves time and effort Also routes to registered loca tions can be calculated easily by touching the corresponding touch panel key This registered location information can also be modified The registered location appears on the map as an icon The registered locations are categorized into the following three types g Home location Register your home location here Once your home location is registered the route to your home can be set by simply touching Return Home in Destination menu Only one location can be registered e gy Favorite location Register a point that you frequently visit for example your office here Once your favorite location is registered a route to your favorite location can be set by simply touching Go to in Destination menu Only one location can be registered e d
68. can expect your position as shown on the map to show fewer errors O If you use chains on your wheels for winter driving or put on the spare wheel errors may suddenly increase because of differ ence in wheel diameter The system detects the fact that the tire diameter has changed and automatically replaces the value for calculating distance Appendix Appendix c 1 If ND PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper When the positioning by GPS is ating in Simple hybrid mode the distance impossible calculation value cannot be replaced auto l e If signals cannot be received from more matically than two GPS satellites GPS positioning does not take place Map matching e n some driving conditions signals from As mentioned the GPS and dead reckoning GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle systems used by this navigation system are In this case it is impossible for the system susceptible to certain errors Their calcula to use GPS positioning tions may on occasion place you in a location on the map where no road exists In this situa tion the processing system understands that vehicles travel only on roads and can correct your position by adjusting it to a nearby road This is called map matching x pu ddy tures With map matching Without map matching When diiving thiugh a dense forest or tall trees Handling Large Errors e Ifa car phone or cellular phone is used near th
69. change or delete the registered shortcuts O You can register a POI shortcut by touching KA on the Shortcut menu The steps for re 56 En gistration and deletion are almost the same as described below Registering a POI shortcut 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Vicinity Search 2 Touch Set PPh Bank ATM PH Restaurant MS Fast Food Chains Ts i Restaurant Chains Displays a list of already registered POI short cuts 3 Touch Add Set Preferred Pol E Gas Staten Bank amp ATM Ff Restaurant Fasi Food Chains Add Oolein a Displays a POI category list 4 Touch a category Set Preferred Pol ME cas Station Mikcpanka ATM TH restaurant Fas Food Chains i Restaurant Chains T hn Supermarkets 5 Touch the POI selection method et Preterred P Soloct All me Select Oetail Pr pack Select All Chapter Setting a Route to Your Destination 06 Selects all detailed categories that are in cluded in that category E g all categories of restaurants including Japanese and fast food Select Detail Selects one of the detailed categories Touch ing a category adds that category to the short cuts Deleting a POI shortcut 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Vicinity Search 2 Touch Set 3 Touch Delete Displays a list of already registered POI short cuts 4 Touch the category to
70. changing Limitations for importing pictures When you burn a CD R RW make sure the total data size of the CD R RW is greater than 100 MB by storing dummy data or other filler information Otherwise the disc may not be recognized by the built in DVD drive O You cannot use a CD R RW containing MP3 files or Audio data CD DA part for Importing pictures O When storing pictures on a CD R RW create a folder named Pictures in the CD R RW and store the picture Tiles in this folder Up to 200 picture files can be used in total including pictures that are already stored in the hard disk drive and pictures in the CD R RW Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions O When you burn a CD R RW limit the number of folder hierarchy levels to eight O You can only use a CD R RW finalized with single session for importing pictures O You can only use a CD R RW finalized with Mode for importing pictures O Only JPEG format jog or JPG pictures can be used Progressive format JPEG pic tures cannot be used O Using only the standard Latin characters alohabets of both cases A Z a z and numbers 0 9 is recommended for the file name If you want to use letters with diacri tical marks Such as 4 or for file name fi nalize the CD R RW with Joliet Unicode format O Pictures up to a maximum of 2592 x 1944 pixels can be used We cannot guarantee proper o
71. csi Other Operator AY Operation Pri Rolu Home Address Wawpoinl Home Tolephone henber Call Hi Address Book Destination History Vicnty Search Tisplay Home Deploy Destination A ue A message to prompt the next operation is given O Ifyou say Back or touch Back the screen returns to the previous screen 4 Say Vicinity Search Say the corresponding commands for the function you want to operate Here the selec tion method of your destination is specified 158 En When you want to search the gas station near est to the current location say Vicinity Search The message Vicinity search Please re quest POI category appears and the naviga tion system pronounces that message 5 Say GAS Station The message Vicinity search Gas Station appears The map of the nearest gas station is shown O For categories that can be used as the voice commands refer to Category list for vicinity search gt For details refer to Category list for vicinity search on page 172 6 Touch VOICE icon 7 Say Next or Previous to select the desired facilities 8 After confirming the location say Set As Destination If there is no route the system starts the route calculation If the route is already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 18 Search for the playlist In this exa
72. display You can set to display the angle icon on scenes where the angle can be switched 1 Touch DVD V Setup in System Settings menu 2 Touch Multi Angle Touching Multi Angle switches between On and Off Chapter lensin Olpny YM pazejad Buzas olpny y Guiziwioysn gt Chapter Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display A wide screen display has a width to height ratio TV aspect of 16 9 while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4 3 If you use a regular rear display has a TV aspect of 4 3 you can set the aspect ratio suitable for your rear display We recommend use this function only when you want to fit it to rear display O When using a regular display select either Letter Box or Panscan Selecting 16 9 may result in an unnatural picture 1 Touch DVD V Setup in System Settings menu 2 Touch TV Aspect Each touch of TV Aspect changes the set tings as follows e 16 9 Wide screen picture 16 9 is dis played as it is initial setting e Letter Box The picture is in the shape of a letter box with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen e Panscan he picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen O When playing discs that do not have a pan scan system the disc is played back with Letter Box even if you select Panscan setting Confirm whether the disc package bears the mark Se
73. emt 206 Index LOCATON CONTMMAUON Sree iriran 31 M IVS Ul P A EEE D S A A TAT 206 Man LOGEC sonek E A i 49 Mab EeNNN ua dead stati a 193 IOs VOC bone a A 38 MOTE 1 airan a a A 95 EEE a a adeaataenetine Monee ntenas 206 NCUA GTS reaa a aaa daedtiete 147 NU EH TOUTE aea a A BZ Molt SESSO anneanne 207 Marsie ODEA ana A E TOTI MOTE NON a a AE 150151 Motng attenuatiol ieren TOO 104 MY RAO GIS CROW O aar a t TS II sachet ath carat eens A aa ae 116 N INO EATR E E EE AA EA E 4 INO UHIIC SUIOTIE COL nee a vente cag carves 68 F AC Wer WGC ia a a Mone aa 207 FOS MCN Aas A Ata nally s alae til ia 148 207 Parking brake I MTCTIOCK cmeisrinatanteaiesaantiedes 22 PO Wie SOOO Kes AET E ATER PAN N So PRONESE eva datceteauetin tsa AN re PICTUPE AC ISTIC IIL sticsniteinlnciai avian rmndieninat 153 Pe SK aire alae tanner ae cata ae Seiko re Renamer ere E ere er ZOO 00 1037198 Protle for the Bluetooth UNI nieis H Q EEA AI EEEE AE S NEE AEAT T 143 R Rear OSI ara nei anvsitbatcaiaaeant 153 Rear DISDIAY oman aa T ante 10 pear Vew Camera naa aA 22 149 Received TaN tO a nt aeration 81 REOT aar aR 207 Roads without turn by turn instructions 43 PO O a e a eaeaee 206 Route calculation Condito vce 32 Route Calculation Conditions vince 34 ROUte CONTIFMATLION SCLEGN v ccecerceseereeeseeeee 32 210 En CITO a 43 Second Maneuver Arrow imao 47 SiMIple AVON MOOC aiaia 179 192 Simulated SOUMCISIAGS caucus neuer nese
74. favorite teams are about to start To use this function you need to set the game alert to the teams in advance 1 Touch Game Alert The League Team Setting screen appears Chapter ED Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS 2 Touch Next or Previous to select the league Game Alert League Team Setting WFL erevi m Previous League T rrevi ia Prevas Tear mierim Alart OFF 3 Touch Next or Previous to select the team 4 Touch On Off The team displayed as On is the alert target Game Alert League Team Setting Back ar WEL On DoH 7 Previous League Hart F ti Previn Teati Hert Fi Prater On Martot 5 Touch Alert On 1 When the selected team is excluded from the alert target the team is displayed as Off Up to 12 teams can be selected When you have already made 12 team se lections Full is displayed and additional team selection is not possible In this case first delete the team selection and then try again Switching the Game Alert on or off You can enable or disable the alert for selected items This function will be useful when to turn the alert off temporarily without changing the setting of each selected team 1 Touch Game Alert The League Team Setting screen appears 2 Touch Alert On or Alert Off When the alert setting is Alert Off CHAE is displayed on the information plate 130 En When a game involving team is broadcast A messa
75. for navigation operation Preferential voice command Other voice command Back Cancel Current Location Voice Help Next Page Previous Page Basic Operation Set As Destination Set As Waypoint Registration Destination POI Address Area Telephone Number Address Book Destination History Vicinity Search Return Home Waypoint Home Call Home Display Home Display Destination Map Operation Zoom Out Zoom In Change Scale XXXX meter s Scale 168 En Return Before Escape Skip My Location Recognition Help Help Next Following Back Page Basics Basic Set Go Route To Destination Begin Guidance Start Set Waypoint Waypoint Register Store Go To Search Point Of Interest Points Of Interest Business Listing Addresses Address Search Search By Address Surrounding Around Telephone Phone Number Registered Points My Addresses Search By Address Book Search History Destination List Vicinity Search Around Search In Vicinity Go Home Drive Home Waypoint lo Home Registered Home As Waypoint Phone Home Dial Home Show Home Destination Map Show Destination Map Map Option Out Higher In Lower Scale Zoom XXX meter s Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 18 XXXX kilometer s Scale XXXX kilometer s XXXX mile s Scale XXXX mile s XXXX yards Scale XXXX yards Change View Mode Normal Map Flat Map Map View Driver s View 2D Twin Map View 3D Twin
76. for the playlist currently playing Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 18 After checking traffic information manually If traffic congestion is found after checking the traffic information manually Do you want to reroute appears on screen In this time you can say voice commands to operate Options Yes The route will be recalculated by touching VOICE icon No The route will not be recalculated and the map screen of that location appears Location screen A and B Location screen A The following commands can be vocalized Set As Destination If there is no route the system starts the route calculation If the route is already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation Set As Waypoint Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation Display Map Displays the map of surroundings on that lo cation Call here If the location has telephone number data touch the VOICE icon to make a call to the lo cation Location screen B The following commands can be vocalized Set As Destination Same as above Set As Waypoint Same as above Display Map Same as above Next See the next POI Previous See the previous POI m En JIOA YIM Wia SAsg UO I eHIAeN ANOA Buizesado Chapter ED Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Other Voice Commands The navigation system also can recognize the words in the following list Other voice commands
77. gt For details refer to Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual on page 142 m System Settings Audio Settings Operating a Music CD You can play anormal music CD using the built in DVD drive of the navigation unit This section describes that operations Selecting CD as the source Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert a disc you want to play to disc loading slot The source changes and then playback will start O If the disc is already set touch the source icon and then touch CD gt For details refer to Se ecting a source on page 97 O When being read in Checking disc is dis played En Chapter olpey pue ana GAG UI 1Ng a24n0S AY a4 Bursn Chapter ED Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio About auto hard disk recording The Navigation system can record the tracks from a music CD into the hard disk drive In default setting the system starts recording automatically when an unrecorded music CD is inserted If you want to cancel the recording touch Stop Stop 145 age ae sound ven sou E 01 rini B T PWNEER TIWE amp nar May r O7 Eyo b oyo O3 integration PREMIER Soo 08 Brilliance gt For more details about Setting the hard disk recording mode refer to Setting the CD recording mode on page 152 gt For details refer to Music Library Recording on page 110 gt For details refer to Music Library Play on page
78. gt For details refer to Setting the alert for each memorized song on this page gt For details refer to Switching the alert setting on this page O If there is slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the song being broadcast no notification will be pro vided though they are the same song O Alert may not be provided depending on the situation of the navigation system Setting the alert for each memorized song You can change the setting of the alert when the track is broadcast again You can enable or disable alert for each song 1 Touch Memo Edit Memorized song list My Mix list will be dis played If the alert setting for the song is on the square on the right is blue Otherwise the square IS Inactive 2 Touch the song title that you want to exclude from the alert target 2 Di WHITE SILVER SAH r O2 Summer of Linn Delobe All Ud Trip Around Tha d GOOLIKE DGLIRE fi Bills Bills Aill Alert tin PF art OH E Ta 0 il The square on the right turn inactive and the song title is excluded from the alert target O If you touch that again the square will turn blue and the song title is included in the alert target Switching the alert setting You can enable or disable the alert for all items at once This function will be useful when you want to turn the alert off temporarily without changing the condition of each mem orized song
79. has been rightfully obtained by you outside of Canada you agree that you will not re export the Software nor any other technical data re ceived from Pioneer nor the direct product thereof except as permitted by the laws and regulations of Canada and the laws and reg ulations of the jurisdiction in which you ob tained the Software 5 TERMINATION This Agreement is effective until terminated You may terminate it at any time by destroy ing the Software The Agreement also will terminate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement Upon such termination you agree to de stroy the Software Chapter Introduction cH 6 MISCELLANEOUS Terms and Conditions for the This is the entire Agreement between Tele Atlas Data Pioneer and you regarding its subject mat ter No sane In this ene shall be ef THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT THE AGREE fective unless agreed to in writing by MENT BETWEEN YOU THE END USER AND Pioneer Pioneer retailers do not have the TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA INC Tele authority to change this Agreement This Atlas BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE ATLAS DATA YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS uoIpnpo u eC TERRA E E Aa AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT strued in accordance with the internal laws of the Province of Ontario and the federal 1 Grant of License laws of Canada applicable therein If any Tele Atlas grants you a non transferable provision of this Agreement is declared inv
80. icons appears on the screen slit i a aca Desplayed iratis information O i9 3 Touch the traffic information item to display A red check appears next to the selected traf fic information UOIFEULIOJU DIZJeAL Huisp Mi Fitra Flow i gt Warming Danger Kp Narrow Road Lane Ciosed Ks Accidente E Road Works T 44 gt Slippery Raad O Traffic Flow includes not only whether or not to display the icon on the map but also whether or not to take the flow information into account when rerouting Touching All None selects or deselects all traffic information 4 Touch OK The selected traffic information icon is added to the screen O The following types of traffic congestion cannot be deselected and are always dis played and taken into consideration stop Chapter KD Using XM Tuner and Other Information Using the XM Tuner to View Stock Sports and Other Information When an XM tuner GEX P10XMT is con nected you can receive stock prices sports and other information and display it onscreen You may also register favorite information on the navigation system Displaying stock prices Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Stock Info Duntes proviso by constam o bo nE be i Picasso note thal these are ool real time values Trade Symbol Change The screen displays a list of stock prices
81. incident are dis played O Touching an incident you want to see allows you to view the detailed information of the incident If the information cannot be dis played on one screen touch M or H to view the remaining information 4 Touch Back to return to the list with traffic information A list with traffic information appears again Checking traffic information on the route All traffic information on the current route in cluding traffic flow information is displayed onscreen in a list Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Traffic On Route The currently set traffic information on the route appears on the screen 66 En O The method for checking the content dis played on the screen is the same for Checking all traffic information Checking traffic flow information on the list The traffic flow information can also be dis played as an onscreen list Touch Information in the navigation menu then touch Traffic Flow The list with the traffic flow information is shown EATE mph You can sort the traffic information by the aver age speed O The other methods for checking the traffic flow information displayed on screen is the same for Checking all traffic information Confirming traffic information on the map O Aline displayed only when the map scale is 2 5 miles 5 km or lower O Icon appears only when the scale on the map is 10 miles 20 km or lo
82. km 1113 Kannada kn 1114 Kashmiri ks 1119 Kurdish ku 1121 Kirghiz ky 1125 Latin la 1201 Lingala In 1214 Laotian lo 1215 Lithusnian It 1220 Latvian Lettish lv 1222 Malagasy mg 1307 Maori mi 1309 Macedonian mk 1311 alayalam ml 1312 ongolian mn 1314 oldavian mo 1315 arathi mr 1318 alay ms 1319 altese mt 1320 Burmese my 1325 Nauru na 1401 Nepali ne 1405 Norwegian no 1415 Occitan oc 1503 Oromo om 1513 Oriya or 1518 Panjabi pa 1601 Polish pl 1612 M M M M M M Language code input code Pashto Pushto ps 1619 Quechua qu 1721 Rhaeto Romance rm 1813 Kirundi rn 1814 Rumanian ro 1815 Kinyarwanda rw 1823 Sanskrit sa 1901 Sindhi sd 1904 Sango sg 1907 Serbo Croatian sh 1908 Shinghalese si 1909 Slovak sk 1911 Slovenian sl 1912 Samoan sm 1913 Shona sn 1914 Somali so 1915 Albanian sq 1917 Serbian sr 1918 Siswati ss 1919 Sesotho st 1920 Sundanese su 1921 Swahili sw 1923 Tamil ta 2001 Telugu te 2005 Tajik tg 2007 Thai th 2008 Tigrinya ti 2009 Turkmen tk 2011 Tagalog tl 2012 Setswana tn 2014 Tongan to 2015 Turkish tr 2018 Tsonga ts 2019 Tatar tt 2020 Twi tw 2023 Ukrainian uk 2111 Urdu ur 2118 Uzbek uz 2126 Vietnamese vi 2209 Volapuk vo 2215 Wolof wo 2315 Xhosa xh 2408 Yoruba yo 2515 Zulu zu 2
83. language the system restarts 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings 2 Touch Language 3 Touch the language that you want to use Once you change the language the system re starts Englich with TTS English without TTE n Frangais Mean O Touching Back returns you to the previous display Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions Chapter O If you select English with TTS the name of the next street you will pass is an nounced If you select English without TTS the name of the next street you will pass is not announced Setting the time difference Adjusts the systems clock Set the time differ ence from the time originally set in your navigation system 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings 2 Touch Time 3 Toset the time difference touch or Time difference 02720 Ak 1200 Summer ime The time difference between the time origin ally set in the navigation system Pacific Stan dard Time and the current location of your vehicle is shown If necessary adjust the time difference Touching or changes the time difference display in one hour incre ments The time difference can be set trom 4 to 9 hours 4 If necessary set to summer time Daylight Saving Time DST is off by default Touch Summer Time to change the time if you are in the daylight s
84. location s pronunciation gt Display the map of surroundings on that facility Search the facilities in vicinity Destination Vicinity Search gt lt Category Name gt lt Sub Category Name gt Location Screen B Displaying the destination history Destination Destination History gt Display the Destination History screen Setting the route to your home Destination Return Home lf the route already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation If there is no route the system starts the route calculation Making phone call to your home Destination Call Home Touch VOICE icon to call your home Only when the phone number is registered in your home Setting your home to waypoint Destination Waypoint Home Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation This function is only available if you have set the destination Display the map of surroundings on your home Destination Display Home Display the map of surroundings on your home Display the map of surroundings on your destination Destination Display Destination gt Display the map of surroundings on your destination Set the map location as your destination Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen gt Basic Operation Set As Desti nation gt f the route already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation If there is no route t
85. menu For details refer to the instructions pro vided with the disc Display the DVD menu keypad Frame by frame playback or slow motion playback Touch and hold to start slow motion playback Touching this during playback pauses the image and each touch forwards a frame To return to normal playback touch H O With some discs images may be un clear during frame by frame playback or slow motion playback O There is no sound during slow motion playback O Reverse slow motion playback is not possible D Switch next page of touch panel keys Repeat play Each touch of the changes the settings as follows e Chapter Repeat Repeat just the cur rent chapter Playback screen page1 00 OF Englich amp OF 1 English a 2 4 O With some discs the icon may be dis sider cen played meaning that the operation is not itie Repeat repeat Just tne curren valid title O Playback and Pause O Ifyou perform chapter title search fast forward rewind or slow motion play Touching gt H switches bet playback oucrung a back the repeat play range changes to and pause ff 2 Touch Skip forward or backward f Touching gt skips to the start of the next a tne Subtitle language Muli sub chapter Touching k once skips to the start of the current chapter Touching again will skip to the previous chapter Touch and hold Fast rewind or forward Keep touching k
86. of the registered cellular phones to overwrite gt For details refer to Connecting a regis tered cellular phone on the next page O The default device name displayed on the cellular phone is PIONEER HDD NAVI The default password is 1111 C18 En Operating from the navigation system 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your cellular phone For some cellular phones no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech nology For details refer to the instruction manual of your cellular phone 2 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 3 Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen appears 4 Touch Registration E Phone Settings Connection Registration navies Nama PIONEER HOO NAY i Password OE Ok 5 Touch Navi The system searches for cellular phones with Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the connection and displays them in the list 6 Wait until your cellular phone appears in the list O If you cannot find the cellular phone you want to connect check that the cellular phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless technology connection 7 Select the cellular phone you want to register from the list 8 Enter the password of the navigation system to register it using your cellular phone After the registration is completed the follow ing screen appears Chapter Using Hands free Phoning dH
87. on the disc is memorized en abling playback from that track when you play the disc again O To play the disc again touch gt H 5 Select upper folder Touch gE to move to the upper folder and play back the first track on that folder If the folder contain no MP3 files the contents of that folder are shown O Ifthe current folder is the ROOT folder can not be used 6 Switch mode between MP3 and music CD CD DA When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data CD DA such as CD EXTRA and MIXED MODE CDs both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD DA Touching Media switches between CD DA part and MP3 part D Display text information on MP3 disc Text information recorded on an MP3 disc can be displayed The next piece of information is displayed e Disc Title disc title e Track Title track title e Folder Title folder name e File Name file name e Artist Name artist name e Genre genre e Release Year release year O The information marked with an asterisk is displayed only when an ID3 tag has been encoded on MP3 files on the disc If specific information of the ID3 tag has not been encoded on MP3 files on disc the corresponding item may be blank Repeat play Each touch of changes the settings as follows e Track Repeat Repeat just the current track e Folder Repeat Repeat the folder cur rently playing O If you select another track or p
88. or Down to switch to another category Using My Mix function My Mix function memorizes the song title and artist name of the song currently being re ceived When the song that matches the mem orized song title and artist name is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to you will be alerted and you can switch the station to listen to that song A track itself is NOT downloaded ONLY the song title and the artist name are memorized Memorizing the song title and the artist name of asong The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to can be memorized to My Mix Touch and hold Memo The song title and artist name of current song you are listening to are memorized and a con firmation message appears O The song title and artist name of up to 15 songs can be memorized Trying to save more than 15 songs will overwrite old ones O The song title or the artist name cannot be memorized when J is displayed on the title information This function invalid for the channel 000 There is a possibility the memorized title is not displayed correctly When the memorized song is broadcast Alert message is displayed Touch Yes to switch to that station and you can listen to that track O If the memorized song is not selected in My Mix list or Alert Off is selected no notification will be provided even when that song is broadcast 126 En
89. or the positioning satellites is poor causing reduced tion of the GPS antenna if necessary or con error is large positioning accuracy Such a loss of tinue driving until reception improves Keep signal quality may happen for the the antenna clear Page 90 following reasons e The GPS antenna is in an unsuita ble location e Obstacles are blocking signals from the satellites e The position of satellites relative to your vehicle is bad e Signals from the GPS satellites have been modified to reduce accu racy GPS satellites are operated by the US Department of Defense and the US government reserves the right to distort positioning data for military reasons This may lead to greater positioning errors 174 En Appendix Appendix c The quality of signals from the GPS Check the GPS signal reception and the posi You cannot position your vehicle satellites is poor causing reduced tion of the GPS antenna if necessary or con on the map or the positioning positioning accuracy Such a loss of tinue driving until reception improves Keep error is large signal quality may happen for the the antenna clear Page 90 following reasons e If a vehicle phone or cellular phone is used near the GPS anten na GPS reception may be lost tem porarily e Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint or vehicle wax be cause this may block the reception of GPS signals Snow buildup can also degrad
90. playlists in which tracks are sorted by artist names e Genre group Genres Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by genres e My Favorite group My Favorites Stores playlists registered with your favorite selection e Maximum number you can register Tracks fora Group Playlist playlist Albums 400 99 Artists 400 400 Genres 13 400 h Favor 5 99 If you try to record one playlist more than the number listed above the oldest playlist will be deleted Touch panel key operation Listening to a track recorded in the Music Library Touch the source icon and then touch LIBRARY When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch panel keys S Di sound isioncoul O01 Grivel i el2 Eyo to oye E Di inbegr aton r 0d PREMER s f 205 Brilliance Select a desired track from the list Touch a desired track to play O Touching M or H switches to the next or previous page in the list 2 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause 3 Touch Skip the track forward or back ward Touching gt l skips to the start of the next track Touching ka once skips to the start of the current track Touching again will skip to the previous track Touch and hold fast backward or for ward Aseiqr DIsniAl 824no0s AY 24 Buisn en 113 Chapter ED Using the AV Source Music Library O You can also
91. pue ana GAG UI 1Ng a24n0S AY a4 Bursn 3 ED Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio Selecting ROM as the source Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert the disc that you want to play into disc loading slot The source changes and then playback will start O Ifthe disc is already set touch the source icon and then touch ROM gt For details refer to Selecting a source on page 97 While loading Checking disc is displayed T Also see Handling and Care of the Disc in the hardware manual and Detail Information for Playable Media on page 199 in this manual for more cautions about handling each media Screen configuration Pod Evan gt 0d Light Sy fl Marth Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Playback method indicator Shows which playback method has been se lected 3 Folder indicator Shows the folder number and folder name currently playing When an ID3 tag has been encoded on the file the disc title will be shown instead of the folder name 4 Track indicator Shows the track number and file name of the track currently playing When an IDS tag has been encoded on the file the track title will be shown instead of the file name Artist name indicator 102 En Shows the artist name currently playing only when an ID3 tag has been encoded on the MP3 file Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track D Fo
92. the left screen w ae PE P E padanie a Ae dsig dey au peasy 0 MoH About the 3D POI Depending on the data the POI may appear in graphical 3D or plate format with POI mark in the left screen of Driver s View O Selects whether to display or hide the 3D O The displayed POI in the left screen has no Landmark on the map relation with the setting of Overlay POI For details refer to 3D Landmark on page 47 2D Twin Map View You can split the screen in half The right Vehicle Dynamics Display _ screen and the left screen can display a map Indicates the status of your vehicle in different scales The 2D map appears on the left screen A CAUTION In Vehicle Dynamics Display mode the speed ometer display may show a different speed than your vehicle s actual soeedometer because your unit measures speed in a different way O You can change the items indicated on the left and right meters gt For details refer to Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Disp ay on page 76 Chapter zy How to Read the Map Display Rear View Rear view image is displayed on the left hand side of the screen while the map of your sur roundings is indicated on the right lf Camera Input is set to Off the rear view image is not displayed Please set it to On gt For details refer to Setting for rear view camera on page 149 O When using a camera set to turn On Off in conjunction with the reverse signal no cam
93. the start of the next track Touching ka once skips to the start of the current track Touching again will skip to the previous track Touch and hold Fast rewind or forward Keep touching ka or gt gt I to perform fast re wind or forward O You can also perform these operations by using TRK lt gt button O Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the beginning of the first track on the disc 4 Stop playback When you stop playback by touching W that track number on the disc is memorized en abling playback from that track when you play the disc again O To play the disc again touch gt H 5 Repeat the current track Each touch of turns the repeat play on or off Track Repeat is displayed on the playback method indicator during track repeat O If you perform track search or fast for ward or rewind repeat play is automati cally canceled 6 Play tracks in a random order Touching EE turns the random play on or off D Scan tracks of a CD Touching BE turns the scan play on or off Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD When you find the de sired track touch gill to turn scan play off O After scanning of a CD is finished nor mal playback of the tracks will begin again m Operating the CD ROM MP3 disc You can play an MP3 disc using the built in DVD drive of the navigation unit This section describes those operations En Chapter olpey
94. time trom the end of the text Continuing to touch the button deletes all of the text City Touch if you want to specify the destination city or area first This is available only when 4 is blank Sym 0 9 Input text with marks such as amp or or numbers Touch to toggle the selection Street Touch if you want to return the street input mode This is available only when is blank di Center This can be selected when you enter a city or area name first Touch this button to dis play the central point of the entered city or area Touching OK searches the route to the central point Proceed to Step 9 O You can customize the keyboard type to be displayed on the screen gt For details refer to Customizing the keyboard layout on page 89 Auto fill in function 30 En The previously entered characters are stored for each state and each search function The next time a character is entered suggested characters will be shown For example if E 220TH ST has been entered in the past when you input just the letter E E 220TH ST will be filled in automati cally The manually input characters are dis played in yellow and the suggested characters are displayed in white so you can distinguish them To confirm the filled in characters touch OK 7 Touch the street from the list ar CALF OSHA QOURT YAY Are If the selected street has only one matching lo cation Route co
95. ting The picture selected for each screen is indi cated on the right side of Splash Screen Navigation Background and AV Back ground items 3 Touch Splash Screen Navigation Background or AV Background Background Picture Splash Sercon PIONEER Original Having pakanana Origine AY Background Original 4 Touch Import from Disc Select Picture i Eack to Original ee Impart rom Oise AURORA CARBON Ty F We DOLPHIN The list of the pictures stored in the CD R RW is displayed On this screen you can select the following item Back to Original Back to PIONEER Origi nal The picture originally used when the system was purchased is selected O Touching an option other than Import from Disc allows you to select a back ground image stored on the hard disk drive 94 En 5 Touch a picture you want to set 6 Touch OK If you touch OK the background image starts changing After a short while the confir mation screen appears O When the image has a large file size it takes more time to change the Background Picture Do not perform other operations until the message Updating Please do not turn off the power disappears O If you want to change to another picture touch Back to return to Step 4 1 When the picture starts to change do not turn off the vehicle engine until the mes sage appears to indicate that the picture has finished
96. using Address Search on page 28 UO EUI S9G Inoa 0 3 NOY e 6ulj 9S Chapter KD Setting a Route to Your Destination Selecting Destination from Destination History and Address Book Any place that has been searched before is stored in Destination History Places that you have registered manually such as your home are stored in Address Book Simply select the place you want to go to from the list and a route to that place will be calculated gt For more details about Operation of the Address Book refer to Viewing Address Book on page 60 gt For more details about Information on Des tination History refer to Operating Destina tion History on page 64 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Address Book or Destination History 2 Touch your destination name iol hti COHASSET ST ia tt OFFICE S BURBANK BLEWDALE P 4 Bu E SLEWP AVE SH ROSE ST TS oA PERSHING SQUARE When a route is not set route calculation starts immediately gt For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 When a route is already set Location confir mation screen is shown gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on page 31 O You can also see the destination by touch ing B on the right of the list m Registering deleting POI Shortcuts You can register up to six shortcuts as your fa vorite POI You can also
97. when play ing back the MP3 part the operation is the same as for MP3 Refer to the instructions for each type of media O If you have switched between playback of MP3 files and audio data CD DA play back starts at the first track on the disc O Playback is carried out in order of file num ber Folders are skipped if they contain no MP3 files For example if folder 01 ROOT contains no MP3 Tiles playback com mences with folder 02 O When playing back files recorded as VBR variable bit rate Tiles the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or re verse operations are used O Ifthe built in DVD drive does not operate properly an error message may be dis played gt For details refer to Messages for Audio Functions on page 184 m Operating the DVD CAUTION For safety reasons video images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view video images you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route refer to 70 ensure safe driving on page 22 You can play a DVD Video using the built in DVD drive of the navigation system This sec tion describes operations for DVD Video Selecting DVD as the source Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert a disc you want to play to disc loading slot The source changes and then playback will start 104 En O Ifthe disc is already set touch the source icon and then touch DVD gt For details refer to Se e
98. your license rights in the Software the related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to an other party provided that the party reads and agrees to accept the terms and condi tions of this License Agreement 2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY The Software and related documentation are provided to you AS IS PIONEER AND ITS LICENSOR S for the purpose of provi sions 2 and 3 Pioneer and its licensor s shall be collectively referred to as Pioneer MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFT WARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IM PLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EX CLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU The Software is complex and may contain some noncontormities defects or errors Pioneer does not warrant that the Software will meet your needs or expectations that operation of the Software will be error free or uninter rupted or that all non conformities can or will be corrected Furthermore Pioneer does not make any representations or warranties regarding the use or results of the use of the Software in terms of its accuracy relia bility or otherwise En uoIpnpo u aD KD Introduction 3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CLAIM OR LOSS IN CURRED BY YOU INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION COMPENSATORY INC
99. 199 CD R CD RW discs 199 MP3 files 200 Display Information 202 Navigationmenu 202 Shortcut menu 203 Menu in the Audio Screen 204 Glossary 205 Index 209 Chapter KD Introduction Manual Overview This manual provides important information you need to make full use of your new naviga tion system The beginning sections outline the navigation system and describe its basic operation The later sections describe the de tails of the navigation functions Chapter 12 to Chapter 17 describe how to op erate the AV functions Please read these chapters when you use a disc in the built in DVD drive or operate the Pioneer audio equip ment connected to the navigation system How to use this manual Be sure to read the following descriptions e License Agreement Refer to License Agreement on page 11 This provides a license agreement of this software Be sure to read this before using the software e About the Data for the Map Database Refer to About the Data for the Map Database on page 18 This provides the date when the Map Data base was recorded e Copyright Refer to Copyright on page 18 This provides the copyright of the Map Da tabase e About Gracenote gt Refer to About Gracenote on page 19 This provides a license agreement and copyright of the Gracenote music recogni tion service Be sure to read this before using this navigation system Finding the operation
100. 2 km h or faster An icon without a number indicates the average speed of the road is more than 45 mph 72 km h O The traffic flow line can be used only when Traffic Settings is selected gt For details refer to Se ecting traffic informa tion to display on page 69 If you want to check the traffic information de tails at the map move the scroll cursor onto an icon such as and touch E This allows you to view place names and other detail infor mation Setting an alternative route to avoid traffic congestion The navigation system checks at certain time intervals whether or not there is the traffic in formation on your route If the navigation sys tem detects any traffic congestion on your current route the system tries to find a better route in the background O Following types of traffic incidents on the route will be checked stop and go stopped traffic and closed blocked roads O Traffic flow information is taken into ac count only when Traffic Flow in Traffic Settings is checked Checking for traffic congestion automatically If there is information about traffic congestion on your current route and if an alternative route can be found the navigation system will recommend a new alternative route automati cally In such a case the following screen will appear O There is no action if the system cannot find any traffic congestion information on your route or the system cannot find an alterna t
101. 59 Chapter ED Operating Your Navigation System with Voice gt For details refer to Changing the pronun ciation of a playlist name or track name on page 119 O For lt Category Name gt and lt Sub Category Name gt in Vicinity Search refer to Cate gory list for vicinity search and say the de sired category in that list O You can skip the commands with the mark For example in case search by Point of interest the system can recognize the com mand even if you say POI without saying Destination O If some candidates have been found the candidate list appears Select the one from the list and proceed to next step O During the voice operation location screen A or B may appear In such a case go to Location screen A and B in the later section and continue the voice operation gt For details refer to Location screen A and B on page 167 O The voice operations related the telephone are available only using hands free phoning feature of this system and is unavailable during a call gt For details refer to Using Hands free Phoning on page 77 Ol Terms written in italics are voice com mands 160 En Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 18 Basic commands for voice operation The following verbal commands can be used both in navigation screen and audio operation n O i GD D 5 Basic commands Back Return the previous sc
102. 621 lensin Olpny YM pazejad Bungas olpny y Huiziwoysn gt Chapter KD Operating Your Navigation System with Voice To Ensure Safe Driving 3 When the command is recognized the navigation system displays the response A CAUTION message on the screen and pronounces it For safety reasons Voice Help menu Voice Reco in some cases g Help is not available while your vehicle is in motion To enable this function you must stop in y a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route 4 Asnecessary repeat Step 3 Depending on the selected languages the commands that you registered before may not 5 The requested operation will be carried be available out gt For details refer to Available Voice Com mands on page 159 CM The voice operation may not be operable for a minute after the navigation system has booted Up O If you operate using CD SR1 Steering Re Basics of Voice Operation mote Control sold separately the following sci buttons can be used for operation Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest VR ACTIVATION OFF HOOK button in voice recognition technology You can use Same function as VOICE icon voice commands to operate many of its func VR CANCEL ON HOOK button tions This chapter describes where you can use voice commands and also what com mands the system accepts Return to previous screen To start voice operation Flow of voice operation No sounds can b
103. Agreement between Pioneer and you regarding its subject mat ter No change in this Agreement shall be ef fective unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer Pioneer retailers do not have the authority to change this Agreement This Agreement shall be governed by and con strued in accordance with the internal laws of the State of California If any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unen forceable the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and ef fect PIONEER AVIC Z3 for Canada THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AS THE END USER AND PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC PIONEER PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS BY USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE MENT THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER oC OUPPLIERS AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS SEPARATE TERMS WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT Refer to page 15 IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO DUCTS INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS WITHIN FIVE 5 DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUGITS TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE MENT 1 GRANT OF LICENSE
104. All _ r anar J Select Detail Mia i Select All Selects all detailed categories included in that category A red check appears next to the se lected category Deselect All Cancels the selected detailed categories Select Detail Selects a detailed category from the list Chapter Using XM Tuner and Other Information CH O Ifyou want to search with more detailed ca 3 Touch the desired item to register your tegories touch Select Detail When the information subcategory list appears touch the item and touch Back When only a few types of the detailed categories are selected blue check marks will appear 7 Edit Policy Humber Edit Insurance Phone Wt i 3555 5 Repeat Step 3 and 4 select a category UEsit TOW Service Phone 1 868 278 9882 and touch OK The POI in the selected category and detailed category is searched O If information is already registered that in formation will appear 6 Touch the name of the facility to set the route you want 4 Input the number you wish to register then touch OK Completes the registration LUCEY MOTORS Dimi Fi j i MANDO MOTORS Co 08 mis W VALLARTE MOTORS off miu Bu ble DISCOUNT ALT 908 oni H ee SIERRA CARS a MORE 09 oi P i Fa auos LOS MEKIC dAl oi When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately gt For details refer to Checking and modifying Edit VIN the route on page 32 Regis
105. Channel name Artist name feature Song program title Information Chan nel number GEX P910XM Channel name Artist name feature Song program title Channel category M This function is not available with GEX P10XMT and GEX P920XM Display the Radio ID If you select CH 000 the Radio ID is dis played 1 Touch 10Key Direct 2 Input 000 and then touch Enter If you select another channel display of the Radio ID is canceled O You can also display the Radio ID to select RADIO ID from channel category in Category Mode Selecting a channel from the XM channel list display The list content can be switched so you can search for the track you want to listen to not only by the channel name but also by the artist name or song title O The channel list shows all channels during All CH Mode and the channels included in the selected category during Category Mode To switch the channel mode touch Mode 1 Touch List XM channel list appears in the display Each touch of List changes the settings as follows Detail information display Ch Name List Channel name Song Title List Song title Artist Name List Artist name SNIMIS INX 221nos AY 34 Huish En 125 Chapter ED Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS 2 Touch the desired channel that you want to listen to Touch H or M to switch to the next page or pre vious page O During Category Mode touch Up
106. Completely returning the navigation system to the initial state on page 190 Xipusddy l En 187 Appendix E Appendix Setting items to be deleted The items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method The items listed in the following table return to the default or factory settings The items not listed below will be retained However if you carry out Clear user infor mation from hard disk all the settings re lated to the navigation function including the items not listed below are deleted he setting will be retained v The setting will be cleared and returned to the default or factory settings Navigation functions Method 1 Method2 Method3 Method 4 View mode and scale setting on the map z n Map function Direction of the map J J Last cursor position on the map screen Current route J A Guidance state of the current t J A Route Setting OES Vehicle position information J J Route conditions J J J Auto fill in function for cities a and streets iDestination medu Point registered in Address o _ y Book Sorting order selected in Ad dress Book Sorting order selected in Traf fic Events Traffic On Route J J and Traffic Flow Traffic Settings J J Phone Settings Phone Menu information mend Phone Book Dial Favorites Dialed Numbers Received J J Calls Phone Menu
107. For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 When the route is already set Location confir mation screen is shown gt For details reter to Checking the location on the map on page 31 O Touching 3 displays a map of the sur roundings of the selected POI O Ifthe selected POI is the name of a chain of outlets and consequently the same store name applies to different locations the number of outlets appears next to the chain s name touch the name of the POI to display a list of those POls with city 52 En name and street name touch to set the POI as your destination Searching for POIs by specifying a category first 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch POI Search 2 Touch the state code key of the destina tion and select the state or province or ter ritory gt For more details about Selecting the state or province where you want to search refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28 3 Touch Category Category Hane tity 4 Touch the desired category PY CALIFORNIA Gas Station Bank ATM bi et Restaurant i Supermarkets E Aulometive Ta ME potaier Chains Name Touch if you want to first specify the POI name City Touch if you want to first specify the destina tion city or area Back Return the Destination menu 5 Touch the detailed category If the categor
108. GH 5 Touch to return to the previous level Select All Selects all tracks in the playlist a enn All Off va Ot Driva i PIONEER TIME Cancels selection of all tracks in the playlist ae Search t elfl Eye to oyo 6 Touch Back I ini gt l r Lpa PREMER ra TE SF lll Brilianes AY Solines 7 Touch Yes The tracks are registered in the selected My Favorite playlist O Up to 99 tracks can be registered in one Asesqiy DISNIAI a21N05S AY 24 Buis p M Favorite la list aS iy bound vision coul y p y gt O01 Drini T PIONEER TIME ng Sound sion soul PO sparch Editing a playlist or tracks Fanna Maa M g p y i Di Comming paner ation g a E You can edit the tracks or playlist recorded in E 0 06 01 01 1250 oe Mka M the Music library T LOS Actas guid AV Sattinas Only the playlists and tracks in Albums group and My Favorites group can be edi ted In Artist group only the pronunciation of the artist playlist can be edited 6 Touch pi The item displayed in blue is the selected play list The system enters the playlist edit mode Switching to the edit mode 1 Touch the playlist in Albu ms lt r soured vision soul My Favorites or Artists samd vision seul Artist PIDHEER TIME 2 Touch the track you want to edit Stored BTracks The item displayed in blue is the track gur Boson Mi peiete Moere update ME asam rently playing Papes This Player Tracke Th iy Favor
109. IDEN TAL INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUEN TIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES LOST PROFITS LOST INCOME LOST SALES OR BUSINESS EXPENDITURES INVEST MENTS OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNEC TION WITH ANY BUSINESS LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL OR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF PLONEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF KNEW OF OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELI HOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITA TION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AG GREGATE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITA TION BREACH OF CONTRACT BREACH OF WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILI TY MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS IF PIONEER S WARRANTY DISCLAI MER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER S LIABILITY SHALL NOT EAXCEED FIFTY PERCENT 60 OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU PORTE EN CLOSED PIONEER PRODUCI Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential da mages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty disclai mer and limitation of liability shall not be applicable to the extent that they are prohib ited by any applicable federal state or local law which provides that such a disclaimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre empted 4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES You agree and certify that neither the Soft ware nor any other technical data received from
110. MY UNCLE Touch the entry in the list to make a call To cancel the call after the system starts dialing touch MEE 4 Toend the call touch g at the top right of the screen Calling a number in Dial Favorites After finding the list in Dial Favorites you want to call you can select the number and make the call O Before using this function you need to set the phone number from the phone book to Dial Favorites gt For details refer to Registering a phone number in Dial Favorites on page 84 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 82 En 2 Touch Dial Favorites The Dial Favorites screen appears 3 Touch one of Favorite 1 to Favorite 5 to make a call Touch the entry to make a call To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch BESE 4 To end the call touch gg at the top right of the screen Dialing the entry in the Address Book You can make a call to the entry registered in the address book O You cannot make a call to locations if the phone number is not registered 1 Display Address Book gt For more details about Operation of the Address Book refer to Viewing Address Book on page 60 2 Touch of the entry you want to call The detail screen appears 3 Touch to make a call Hare Wakao ST Phone B4S 227 8240 icon sPicbure Ha Picture Sound Ky Soumi Modify Location To
111. Map View Route View Turns Turn View Guide View Rear View Rear Back View Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics Meters North Up North Compass Heading Up Route Options Change Route Options Change Route New Route Update Route Rerouting Use Main Road Main Roads Take Main Roads Use Fast Route Use Short Route Short Route Shortest Route Use Freeway Freeways Highways Use Ferry Use Toll Road Avoid Freeway Avoid Highway Avoid Interstate Avoid Ferry Avoid Ferries Skio Ferries Avoid Toll Road Cancel Route Delete Route Cancel Guidance Route Profile Cancel Waypoint Next Guidance Following Guidance Guidance After This Traffic View Traffic Info Display Traffic Information Current Traffic Information Display Traffic Information Traffic Events List On Route List Route List Traffic On Route Traffic On Route List Traffic Flow List Flow List Flows Traffic Flow View Mode Change View Driver 8D 2D Twin 2D Split 3D Twin 3D Split Guide Arrow Head Up Car Up Edit Route Fast Route Fastest Route Ferry Ferries Toll Road Payroad Avoid Tolls Avoid Pay Profile Delete Waypoint Take Away Waypoint Traffic Condition Event List Events Traffic Events JIOA YZIM Wa sAs UOI eHIAeN nog Huljessdo Chapter ED Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Call Dial Ring Dial Out Place A Call Make A Call Call Registered Point C
112. Mute Level changes the set tings as follows e All The volume becomes 0 e 20dB The volume becomes 1 10 e 10dB The volume becomes 1 3 O When you select All Mute is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible dur ing the sound is turned off 1 When you select 20dB or 10dB no audio adjustments except volume control are possible during the sound is attenu ated T Operation returns to normal when the cor respond action is ended Even when a mute signal has been received trom MUTE lead connected to the naviga tion unit navigation voice guidance cannot be attenuated or muted If you want to mute the navigation guidance voice temporarily use gif on the navigation map screen Changing the voice output of the navigation guidance You can set the speaker to output the naviga tion guidance and phone voice etc Touch Guide Tel SP in System Settings menu Each touch of Guide Tel SP changes the set tings as follows e Left SP Uses only the front left soeaker e Right SP Uses only the front right speak er e L R SP Uses both the front right and left speakers Switching the auto antenna setting If the blue lead of the navigation system is connected to the antenna control terminal of the vehicle select either of the following set tings e Radio The antenna extends or turns on only when the audio source is FM or AM The antenna is stored or turned off when the sourc
113. ND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY SATIS FACTORY QUALITY ACCURACY TITLE AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFOR MATION PROVIDED BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS EMPLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY AND YOU ARE NOT EN TITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE OR INFORMATION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI TION OF THE AGREEMENT 4 Limitation of Liability TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREE MENT INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF COVER LOSS OF USE OR BUSI NESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE RE GARDLESS OF WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOTWITHSTANDING ANY THING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED HEREIN TELE ATLAS SHALL HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANY CAUSE REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT 5 Termination This Agreement will terminate immediately and automatically without notice if you breach any term of this Agreement You agree that in the event of termination of the Agreement you shall return the Data in cluding all documentation and all copies to Tele Atlas and its suppliers 16 En 6 Indemnity You agree to indemnity defend and hold
114. NTS OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNEC TION WITH ANY BUSINESS LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL OR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF PIONEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF KNEW OF OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELI HOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITA TION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AG GREGATE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITA 14 En WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILI TY MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS IF PIONEER S WARRANTY DISCLAI MER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER S LIABILITY SHALL NOY EACEED FIFTY PERCENT 60 OF TRE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE EN GCLOSED PIONEER PRODUGI Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential da mages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty disclai mer and limitation of liability shall not be applicable to the extent that they are prohib ited by any applicable federal state or local law which provides that such a disclaimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre empted 4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES You agree and certify that neither the Soft ware nor any other technical data received from Pioneer nor the direct product thereof will be exported outside Canada except as authorized and as permitted by the laws and regulations of Canada If the Software
115. O Operation varies depending on the exter nal unit connected In some cases the external unit may not respond 3 Send a 1 key to 6 key command gt For details refer to Operate the external unit by using 1 key 6 key on this page 4 Operate the external unit by using Function 1 to Function 4 key and Auto Manual key gt For details refer to Operate the external unit by using Function 1 Function 4 on this page gt For details refer to Switching the auto matic and manual function on this page Operate the external unit by using 1 key 6 key The external unit can be operated by transmit ting the operating commands set to 1 key 6 key 1 Touch 1 6 2 Touch desired key to operate the exter nal unit 1 To return to the previous screen touch Back O Operation varies depending on the external unit connected In some cases some func tions may not be used until you touch and hold the key 140 En Operate the external unit by using Function 1 Function 4 The external unit can be operated by transmit ting the operating commands set to Function 1 Function 4 O The operating commands set to Function 1 Function 4 vary depending on the exter nal unit 1 Touch Function 2 Touch Function 1 2 3 or 4 EMTS ui all OVD D Function 1 Finelin I Fimetion Finetion 4 Amio Mandal ft Hida The operation command is transm
116. OA ST On this screen you can select the following items All Selects all entries None Displayed when all locations are selected Cancels all selected locations 4 Touch Delete 5 Select Yes The data you selected is deleted Alternative option No Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4 O Because deleted data cannot be restored take extra care not to delete by mistake Chapter Using Traffic Information CH Using XM NavtTraffic Information If you have a GEX P10XMT XM Digital Satellite Data amp Audio Receiver Sold separately at tached to the navigation system and have an active subscription to XM NavTraffic service you can view current traffic conditions and in formation on your navigation display When the unit receives updated traffic information the navigation system will overlay the traffic in formation on your map and also display de tailed text information when available When you are traveling along a route and there is traffic information on your current route the system will detect it and ask you if you would like to be rerouted or Suggest another route automatically O The system acquires the traffic information up to 100 miles in radius from the vehicle position If there is a lot of traffic informa tion around your vehicle the radius will be shorter than 100 miles O The navigation system provides the follow ing functions by using the information fr
117. OI Name you can search for a POI O You can also narrow down the search range by initially specifying the name of the city where your destination is located and also by initially specifying the category O Use the functions POI Search and Vici nity Search in different situations In POI Search the distance is not limited within the selected state or province but in Vici nity Search the distance for the search is limited to within a 16 km 10 miles radius The following three methods are available for searching facilities by POI e Searching for POIs by specifying a category first e Searching for POIs by specifying a city name first e Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facilities Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facilities 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch POI Search 2 Touch the state code key of the destina tion and select the state or province or ter ritory gt For more details about Selecting the state or province where you want to search refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28 3 Input the name of the facilities t City Touch to specify the destination city or area and then input the city name This is available only when Name is blank Category Touch to specify the POI category This is available only when Name and City are blank List Lists candidates based on th
118. P3 Tiles in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back However there is a delay when starting playback on discs with numerous tiers For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers e tis possible to play back up to 253 folders on one disc Appendix gt Appendix Display Information Dial 31 Navigation menu Phone Book 82 84 z Read Bus Card 83 cee information Mag Setlngs je E i a Dialed Numbers 81 86 Ren Gets PO Route an Search Overview Received Calls 81 86 i me vg Destination Dipan Caneel Phone Settings 78 History Frane Search Route SSa_a _aeaj _ snanana eee eee SSS ETT iia Stock Info 70 Set My Favorites 70 My Favorites 71 Address Search 28 Emergency Info 73 Return Home 55 58 XM Status 79 Go to 55 58 POI Search 51 Map menu Route Overview 34 e information re Address Book 56 98 Dislayed Shart Out Wey Man Lagend View Mode Destination History 56 64 Days Minit i ado Poad Color Telephone Search D5 Display Made Vicinity Search 53 Autom abel fa E Bue Vicinity Search Cancel Route 33 Information menu Displayed Info l Close Up View 46 Destinations Mul my tines q a _ City Map 46 Trattic On Trate Bist Trafic Piong baer oS ee Poule Evente Flow Settings Tracking Display 46 o ae WH Status Show Mute Button 46 Fav eRe io ee Fas rg iii Show Traffic Incident 46 Second Maneuver Arrow 46 Bluetooth Connected 46 Tra
119. PT OF THE PRODUCTS TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE MENT 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Pioneer grants to you a non transferable non exclusive license to use the software in stalled on the Pioneer products the Soft ware and the related documentation solely for your own personal use or for internal use by your business only on such Pioneer products You shall not copy reverse engineer trans late port modity or make derivative works of the Software You shall not loan rent dis close publish sell assign lease subli cense market or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not ex pressly authorized by this agreement You shall not derive or attempt to derive the source code or structure of all or any portion of the Software by reverse engineering dis assembly decompilation or any other means You shall not use the Software to op erate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data for other persons or entities Pioneer and its licensor s shall retain all copyright trade secret patent and other proprietary ownership rights in the Soft ware The Software is copyrighted and may not be copied even if modified or merged with other products You shall not alter or re move any copyright notice or proprietary le gend contained in or on the Software You may transfer all of
120. Pioneer nor the direct product thereof 12 En will be exported outside the United States except as authorized and as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United States If the Software has been rightfully obtained by you outside of the United States you agree that you will not re export the Software nor any other technical data re ceived from Pioneer nor the direct product thereof except as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United States and the laws and regulations of the jurisdiction in which you obtained the Software 5 TERMINATION This Agreement is effective until terminated You may terminate it at any time by destroy ing the Software The Agreement also will terminate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement Upon such termination you agree to de stroy the Software U S GOVERNMENT END USERS If the Software is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government the Data is li censed with Limited Rights Utilization of the Software is subject to the restrictions specitied in the Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or the equivalent clause for non defense agencies Pioneer Electronics USA Inc 2265 East 220th Street Long Beach CA 90810 Chapter Introduction cH 7 MISCELLANEOUS This is the entire
121. Pioneer sound vision sSoul Operation Manual HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER AVIC Z3 Notice to all users This software requires that the navigation system is properly connected to your vehicle s parking brake and depending on your vehicle additional installation may be required For more information please contact your Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at 800 421 1404 English ED Contents Points about recording 24 Data saved or recorded by the customer 25 Failureto operate 25 e The screens shown in the examples may differ from the actual screens Visit Our Web Site 25 e The actual screens may be changed with Out notice for performance and function Basic Operation improvements Flow from Startup to Termination 26 How to Use Navigation Menu Screens 26 D Introduction Displaying the Navigation menu 26 Navigation menu overview 27 Basic Navigation 28 Basic flow of operation 28 Calculating your destination by using 10 Address Search 28 Checking and modifying the route 32 When the route guidance starts 33 Canceling the Route Guidance 33 Manual Overview 8 Howto use this manual 8 Overview foreach chapter 8 Terminology 10 About the definition of terminology Color difference of the map display between day and night 10 License Agreement 11 PIONEER AVIC Z3 forU SA 11 Moditying the Route Calculation PIONEE
122. R AVIC Z3 for Canada 13 Conditions 34 Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas Items that users can operate 34 Data 15 Checking the Current Route 35 About the Data for the Map Checking the passing streets with a Database 18 list 35 Copyright 18 Checking the entire route overview on About Gracenote 19 themap 36 Editing Waypoints 36 02 Before Using the System Adding a waypoint 36 Important Safety Information 21 Deleting a waypoint 37 Additional Safety Information 22 Sorting waypoints 37 To ensure safe driving 22 Skipping a waypoint 37 Features Characteristics of this software 22 D How to Read the Map Display About XM Navtraffic Service and How to Use the Map 38 Pioneer Navigation 24 Switching the view mode 38 Notes tor tard Disk Dave 24 How to view the map of the current location 38 Roads without turn by turn instructions 43 Changing the scale of the map 43 Recording equipment and copyright 24 Notes when writing data to the hard disk drive at low temperature 24 C2 tn Contents an Scroll the map to the location you want tosee 43 Shortcutmenu 45 D Modifying Map Configurations Entering the Map Menu 46 Setting the Item on the Map Screen 46 Selecting the Shortcut 48 Displaying POI on the Map 49 Viewing the Map Color Legend 49 Changing the View Mode for the Navigation Map 49 Setting the Map Color Change between Day and Night 50 Changi
123. Settings in the navigation menu then touch Hardware 2 Touch Installation Angle Setup 92 En 3 Check the direction the LCD panel faces and touch the corresponding item if your une te insialled at an angle in polation in the driven nue to the angle of your dashboard select the seeropriate angle setup below incorrect angle seten could cause mconroct postions of the vetele on the map Left Select this when the angle is 5 or more to the left from the center Center default Select this when the angle is less than 5 to the left and right from the center Right Select this when the angle is 5 or more to the right from the center 1 If Learning Status in 3D Calibration Status is Simple Hybrid the installation angle can be corrected Checking the device and version information 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Hardware 2 Touch Service Info Screen 3 Check the device and version informa tion Checking the hard disk information You can check the volume of the hard disk Current used space and remaining space O The hard disk space means free space of the music library In some cases even when about 10 of free space is left no more music tracks may be recorded due to system restriction 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Hardware Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions 2 Touch Hard Disk In
124. Street name city name area name and other information for this location The information displayed varies according to the scale Touching DA on the right displays hidden text Current location key Touching gi returns you to the map of your current location Viewing the information of a specified location An icon appears at registered places home lo cation specific places Address Book entries and places where there is a POI icon or traffic information icon Place the scroll cursor over the icon to view detailed information 1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cur sor to the icon you want to view 44 En Information for a specified location appears Address Book Information FERSHIKG SOUARE LOS ANGELES The information shown varies according to the location There may be no information for that location gt For more details about Registering places refer to Registering Locations Overview on page 58 gt For more details about Displaying facilities POI icon on the map refer to Displaying POI on the Map on page 49 gt For more details about Icons for traffic in formation refer to Traffic event icon and line on page 66 oO appears when the Bluetooth unit sold separately is connected to the naviga tion system together with the cellular phone By touching REA you can make a phone call to the displayed phone number gt For details refer to Dialing from th
125. Switching the Game Alert on or off on the next page Display game information You can display game information and changes to the broadcast channel gt For details refer to Displaying game infor mation Game Info on the next page Memorize the current song The song title and artist name being broad cast will be memorized in My Mix When the song that matches the song informa tion memorized in My Mix is broadcast you can tune the channel to the one that is broadcasting that song gt For details refer to Memorizing the song title and the artist name of a song on page 131 Set the notification of the memorized songs You can set the alert for the songs memor ized in My Mix You can also delete the memorized song gt For details refer to Setting the alert for each memorized song on page 131 gt For details refer to Deleting the memor ized songs on page 131 di Select a SIRIUS channel directly The Channel number input screen appears You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering the desired channel number While the input number is displayed touch Enter and then touch Back 1 To cancel the input numbers touch Clear 2 Switch the touch panel keys to previous page 3 Switch the channel category Touch Up or Down to select the desired category SNIMIS INX 224NOS AY y Huish Selecting teams for Game Alert This navigation system can alert you when games involving your
126. TS OR LOST REVEN WES Gracenote 2006 Other Precautions e Part of the data cannot be acquired The contents of the data in the Gracenote Da tabase included in the hard disk drive are not 100 guaranteed e The Gracenote Database included in the hard disk drive contains the titles for the 300 000 most frequently accessed albums worldwide as of August 2007 m En Chapter Before Using the System 02 Never allow others to use the system un less they have read and understood the op Important Safety Information 7 Before using your navigation system be sure to read and fully understand the following erating instructions O Never use this navigation system to route D safety information to hospitals police stations or similar facil o ities in an emergency Stop using any func D A WARNING tions relating to the hands free phone and G e Do not attempt to install or service your navi please call 911 gation system by yourself Installation or servi O Route and guidance information displayed cing of the navigation system by persons by this equipment is for reference purposes 5 without training and experience in electronic only It may not accurately reflect the latest a equipment and automotive accessories may permissible routes road conditions one lt be dangerous and could expose you to the way streets road closures or traffic restric a risk of electric shock or other hazards tions 3 e When a
127. Tele Atlas its Licensors and its Suppliers including their respective licensors suppli ers assignees Subsidiaries affiliated com panies and the respective officers directors employees shareholders agents and representatives free and harmless from and against any liability loss injury includ ing injuries resulting in death demand ac tion cost expense or claim of any kind or character including but not limited to attor ney s fees arising out of or in connection with any use or possession by you of the Data Chapter Introduction cH 7 U S Government Rights If you are an agency department or other entity of the United States Government or funded in whole or in part by the United States Government then use duplication reproduction release modification disclo sure or transfer of this commercial product and accompanying documentation is re stricted in accordance with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED rights as described in DFARS 252 221 7014 a 1 SUN 1995 DOD com mercial computer software definition DFARS 227 7202 1 DOD policy on commer cial computer software FAR 52 227 19 JUN 1987 Commercial computer software clause for civilian agencies DFARS 252 227 7015 NOV 1995 DOD technical data commercial items clause FAR 52 227 14 Alternates Il and Ill JUN 1987 civilian agency technical data and noncom mercial computer software clause and or FAR 12 211 and FAR 12 212
128. V button to switch Audio opera tion screen 2 Touch the source icon Source icon i UIA ae Sound vison soul a mo O01 Grrvod PWOHEER TIME oe do r j M ora D2 Eye to oyt O3 integration ld PREMIER ee 05 Brilianes Touch OFF to turn the source off Touch REAR SCREEN to select the source for Rear display gt For details refer to Se ecting the video for Rear display on page 153 Select a source by using AV button You can press AV button to switch the source 1 Press AV button to switch Audio opera tion screen 2 Press AV button to select the desired source Press AV button repeatedly to switch between the following sources En Chapter olpey pue ana GAG UI 1Ng a24n0S AY a4 Bursn ED Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio CD ROM MP3 DVD built in DVD drive LIBRARY Music library FM FM tuner AM AM tuner XM XM tuner SIRIUS SIRIUS tuner iPod iPod M CD multi CD TV television AV INPUT video input AUX auxiliary equipment EXT 1 external unit 1 EXT 2 external unit 2 O In the following cases the sound source cannot to be used When a unit corresponding to each source is not connected to the naviga tion system When no disc is set in the navigation system When no magazine is set in the multi CD player When AUX Input is se
129. XM 124 En Ch 017 2 Ue Calesory 8 Ch O17 The Beach Items marked with an asterisk cannot be used on GEX P910XM or GEX P900XM Touch Recalling channels from the pre set Touch to recall the preset channel O In All CH Mode you can also recall the preset channel by pressing the P LIST A F button O In Category Mode the screen shows category search Touch and hold Storing broadcast sta tions You can register the channel currently being broadcast to the preset list I Up to 18 stations 6 for each of three XM bands can be stored in memory T If you use GEX P910XM or GEX P900XM the channel number does not appear on the touch panel key 2 Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one at a time o If you keep touching KERSE or EJ you can skip broadcasting channels O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 3 Switching to the list display You can select a desired channel from the list display gt For details refer to Se ecting a channel from the XM channel list display on the next page 4 Switching the XM channel select mode You can switch the mode between the two methods for selecting and listing the chan nel All CH Mode Chapter Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS 14 You can select a channel from all channels when you operate Category Mode You can select a channel within selected ca tegory when you o
130. You can enable or disable alert for each song 1 Touch Memo Edit My Mix setting screen will be displayed 2 Touch Previous and Next to select the song title that you want to exclude from the alert target 7 PRE IDLE Pier Merto 3 Touch On Off Each touch of On Off turns the alert setting for the song On or Off Switching the alert setting You can enable or disable the alert for all items at the time This function will be useful when you want to turn the alert off temporarily without changing the condition of each mem orized song 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch Alert On or Alert Off When the alert setting is Alert Off CHIE is displayed on the information plate Deleting the memorized songs You can delete each one of the memorized songs 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch Previous or Next to select the song title that you want to delete 3 Touch Delete This Song when the song you want to delete is displayed A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion 4 Touch Yes SNIUIS INX 221Nnos AY 24 Buisn Chapter ED Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS Using the Traffic amp Weather preset function You can listen to the memorized Traffic amp Weather channel by directly calling it up with the T button on the navigation system Only one station can be memorized Memorize a Traffic amp Weather channel 1 Tune into the Traffic amp Wea
131. a non exclusive license to use the map data lid or unenforceable the remaining provi and business points of interest information sions of this Agreement shall remain in full the POIs together the Data contained force and effect on these discs solely for personal non com mercial use and not to operate a service bu reau or for any other use involving the processing of data of other persons or enti ties You may make one 1 copy of the Data for archival or backup purposes only but you may not otherwise copy reproduce modity make derivative works derive the structure of or reverse engineer the Data The Data contains confidential and proprie tary information and materials and may contain trade secrets so you agree to hold the Data in confidence and in trust and not to disclose the Data or any portions in any form including by renting leasing publish ing leasing sublicensing or transferring the Data to any third party You are prohibited from removing or obscuring any copyright trademark notice or restrictive legend 2 Ownership The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its licensors and they retain all ownership rights in the Data You agree not to alter re move obliterate or obscure any copyright notice or proprietary legend contained in or on the Data Chapter KD Introduction 3 Warranty Disclaimer THE DATIAIS PROVIDED ON AN ASIS AND WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS AND TELE AIPASA
132. a or gt gt I to perform fast re wind or forward If you keep touching ka or PPI for five seconds the icon lt lt or gt changes into lt E or fai When this hap Each time you touch Subtitle the DVD switches between subtitle language Change the viewing angle Multi angle Each time you touch Angle the DVD switches between viewing angles olpey pue ana GAG UI 1Ng a24n0S AY a4 Bursn 3 En ED Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio O During playback of a scene shot from multiple angles the angle icon w is displayed Turn the angle icon display on or off using DVD V Setup menu gt For details refer to Setting angle icon dis play on page 147 di Change audio language and audio sys tems Multi audio Each time you touch Audio the DVD switches between audio language and audio system O Only digital output of DTS audio is pos sible If navigation system s optical digi tal outputs are not connected DTS audio can not be output so select an audio setting other than DTS O Display indications such as Dolby D and 5 1ch indicate the audio system re corded on the DVD Depending on the setting playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated 2 Specify the chapter you want to play back or the time to start playback by entering a number gt For details refer to Searching for a desired scene Starting playback from a specified time on this page 3 P
133. a5 jes u y HulAjipo en 95 Chapter ED Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions Restoring the Default Setting Resets various settings registered to the navi gation system and restores to the default or factory settings 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Restore Factory Set tings 2 Touch Yes to clear the current setting O Touch No to cancel clear the current set ting gt For details refer to Returning the Naviga tion System to the Default or Factory Set tings on page 187 96 En Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio You can play or use the following sources with the navigation system e DVD Video e CD e MP3 disc e Radio FM e Radio AM e Music Library For more details about music library to Chapter 13 This chapter describes how to use the AV source and the basic operation of the AV SOUICE refer Basic Operation Switching the Audio operation screen Press AV button to switch Audio opera tion screen W WOODBURY RO LOR gm n sound vision Soul a 0i Grivel 7 PIONEER TIME 02 10 May Pe or oeived O2 Eyo lo oye 3 integration Ld PREMER Wr 40s 8 Brilliance i Lay sotinas Touch panel keys O Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys If you touch the screen the touch panel keys are displayed again Selecting a source Select a source on AV Source Menu 1 Press A
134. account F Off Calculate the route without the travel history taken into account Clear Clear the current travel history J Checking the Current Route You can check information about the route be tween your current location and your destina tion You can select two methods e Checking the passing streets with a list e Checking the entire route overview on the map Checking the passing streets with a list You can check the route details O This function is not available if your vehicle has deviated from the route 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview Route confirmation screen appears O Route Overview is displayed only when the route is set 2 Touch Profile a anh HiT ations Profile petal Waypoints 3 Touch or to scroll the list Scroll the list as necessary Names of the streets you are driving through A JILINCOLN AVE relPARTHE DR Pe MOUNTAIN ST HJN FAIR OAKS AVE i WOODBURY Ril Turning direction Driving distance 4 Touch Back You can return to the previous display uo e190d0C Jiseg KD Basic Operation O When a long distance route is calculated your navigation system may not be able to list all roads In this case the remaining roads will be shown in the list as you drive on Checking the entire route overview on the map You can check the entire shape of the current route 1 Touch Destina
135. age be sure to touch the touch panel keys with a finger The stylus is supplied for special ca librations Do not use the stylus for normal operations 3 Press MENU button This displays the navigation menu 26 En 4 Assign a destination by using the touch panel key and beginning route guidance or operating the Audio source Dorii pr Mag sellings 3 tgi i Address Retur oo PO Route Sanh Search Overvi IEW ey amp a m Destination Dami Vicunity Cancel His Hry Starch Route JE O Touch panel keys that are not available at this time are inactive gt For more details about Specifying the ad dress and searching for the destination refer to Calculating your destination by using Ad dress Search on page 28 gt For more details about Other search meth ods refer to Chapter 6 gt For more details about How to use audio source refer to Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio on page 97 5 Turn off the vehicle engine to termi nate the system The navigation system is also turned off O Until your vehicle reaches the vicinity of the destination the set route will not be deleted even if the engine is turned off How to Use Navigation Menu Screens The basic navigation is performed by using menus The navigation menu is divided into four menus Destination Information Map and Settings Displaying the Navigation menu 1 Press MENU button 2
136. all Address Book Call Registered Call Phone Number Call By Number Call Number Call By Phone Number Call Using Phone Number Telephone Book lel Book Phone Book Redial Call Again Phone Again Call Favorite X Call X Phone X Received Call Received Who Called Other Operation Other Others Erase Tracks Delete Tracks Remove Tracks Display Overlay POI Show Overlay POI Display POIs Yes Ok Agree No Not Ok Disagree Other voice commands for AV operation Preferential voice command Other voice command Navigation Screen Navigation Navi AV Screen AV Audio Change Source Next Source Source Change CD Change To CD Switch To CD DVD Change To DVD Switch To DVD IV Change To TV Switch To TV AM Change To AM Switch To AM FM Change To FM Switch To FM AV Inout Video Input MCD CD Changer Music Library Change To Music Library Switch To Music Library Music Search Search My Music Search Music Album Search By Album Search Album Artist Search By Artist Search Artist Genre Search By Genre Search Genre Rock Pop Rock Pop Hip Hop Rap Hip Hop Rap Soul Urban Soul Urban Track Search Search By Track 170 En Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 18 iPod Change To iPod Switch To iPod XM Change To XM Switch To XM Sirius Change To Sirius Switch To Sirius JIOA YZIM W ZS S uoepineny nog Huljessdo Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Category list for vicinity search
137. an Natural Yota Flai Matom Custom Touch ESC to return to the selected source screen currently Touch Back to return to the AV Settings screen m Customizing the Audio Settings Items Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match vehicle interior acoustic characteris tics as desired Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer curves which you can easily recall Here is a list of the equal izer Curves Equalizer curve Super Bass Super Bass is a curve in which only low range is boosted Powerful Default Powerful is a curve in which low range and high range sounds are boosted Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Natural Natural is a curve in which low range and high range sounds are slightly boosted Vocal Vocal is a curve in which the mid range sounds such as the human vocal range are boosted Flat Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted Custom1 Custom is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre ate A separate custom curve can be created Cus tom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curves that you create Adjustments can be made with a 3 band parametric equalizer Custom2 Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre ate If you select this curve the effect is reflected all audio source 1 Touch Equalizer in Audio Settings menu 2 Touch desired equalizer Powerful Customize
138. an be stored as My Fa vorites so that it can be accessed without searching every time an update is needed O The displayed items depend on the infor mation that is sent from each station O My Favorites can store up to 50 items Chapter Using XM Tuner and Other Information CH 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu then touch Set My Favorites The screen will display a list of categories The information appearing onscreen is automati cally updated at regular intervals 2 Touch a category you want to browse from the list Set My Favorites Sports If an item is divided into more detail cate gories select the one from the list to narrow down the category After narrowing down the message confirming whether or not to register the item 4 Touch OK a Prose OK if you want to store thes item ia the My Favorites lish T om Te Chicago fears Cancel If the storing step is successful the confirma tion screen will appear Touch OK to complete the storing and return to the previous screen Displaying favorite browsable Information You can check and delete the browsable infor mation you registered 1 Store the desired item topic gt For details refer to Storing browsable infor mation on the previous page 2 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch My Favorites A list of registered items topics appears on the screen 3 Touch an item t
139. annot be accepted O The data saved or recorded onto this navi gation system by the customer cannot be guaranteed during repair or service Lost data that was saved or recorded by the cus tomer is not guaranteed O Due to copyrights the music data recorded into the Music Library cannot be backed up during repair or service Failure to operate Should the navigation system fail to operate properly contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer service facility After sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor from which you purchased the product for after sales service including warranty conditions or any other information In case the necessary information is not available please contact the companies listed below Please do not ship your product to the compa nies at the addresses listed below for repair without making advance contact e U S A Pioneer Electronics USA Inc CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION PO Box 1760 Long Beach CA 90801 1760 800 421 1404 CANADA Pioneer Electronics of Canada Inc CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT 300 Allstate Parkway Markham Ontario L3R OP2 1 877 283 5901 905 479 4411 For warranty information please see the Lim ited Warranty sheet included with your pro duck wia sAs au Bulsp a1ojag Visit Our Web site Visit us at the following site http www pioneerelectronics com In Canada http www pioneerelectronics ca 1 Register your p
140. ard ing safe operation Connection failed The house number entered does not exist in the database for the speci fied street Facilities of the selected category do not exist in the surrounding areas In rare cases a route calculation error may occur There is no available traffic informa tion now Cannot load the image because Pic tures folder is not found in the in serted disc Failed to read the data because the CD R is damaged or dirty Or the pick up lens of the DVD drive is dirty Pictures folder exists on the CD R but no data in JPEG format exists The data is damaged or an attempt was made to set a JPEG image that was not made to specifications as the background picture Parking brake lead is incorrectly connected The cellular phone s Bluetooth wire less technology is turned off The cellular phone is paired con nected with another device Rejection has been received from the cellular phone The target cellular phone can not be found Registration step has been success ful but connection has failed for some reason Re enter the existing house number Or pro ceed to the next step without entering the house number and set the main point of that street as your destination Use another search method or move to an other location and perform Vicinity Search again e Retry e Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes sage persists Move to the location wh
141. arious settings are available with the audio source according to your audiovisual needs This chapter describes the methods of chan ging the various settings and setting the LCD panel AV Setting Overview The audio visual setting is divided into Audio Settings and System Settings Audio Settings screen Ais sittings a Weine FRI System Settings Wooler j a i P ad HPF Eie Level tH OE Audio Settings lovo v Wide Selup Mode m Ful Mute Set hurt Level TAYR 2E gt For more details about Audio Settings refer to this page to page 146 gt For more details about System Settings refer to page 146 to page 152 C1 When Preout the subwoofer controller set ting in System Settings menu is Full the Non Fading will be displayed instead of Sub Woofer gt For details refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 152 When selecting the FM tuner as the source you cannot select Source Level How to Operate the Audio Settings screen 1 Press AV button The Navigation screen changes to the Audio source screen of any source 142 En 2 Touch AV Settings The AV Settings screen appears 3 Touch the item you want to change Auto setings a Wrens Fra System Settings j Wonter Powertul a LR orl ad HPF Eie Level 4 Change Setting E g Equalizer screen x Powerful Cosboman Sip r Bass Piw
142. ates the recommended lane If the next tra veling direction screen is displayed when you approach a interchange junction or exit the lane information disappears Freeway signs Show the road number and give directional in formation Freeway exit information Displays the freeway exit 20 Bluetooth Connected icon This icon shows whether the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology is connected or not You can select between display and non display E Connected ES Disconnected O This is available only when the Blue tooth unit sold separately is con nected gt For more details about Selecting dis play or non display for the Bluetooth Connected icon refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46 21 Mute Voice Guidance icon Touch to turn on or off the mute setting of Voice Guidance You can select between dis play and non display Chapter How to Read the Map Display 04 gt For more details about Selecting display or non display for the Mute Voice Guidance icon refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46 22 Second Maneuver Arrow Indicates the turning direction after next You can select between display and non display gt For more details about Selecting display or non display for Second Maneuver Arrow refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46 23 POI icon The POI icon may appear on the enlarged map of the intersection when available data exists
143. ation includ ing name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers or em bedded databases collectively Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this applica tion or device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Ser vers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy trans fer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACE NOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PER MITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Soft ware and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Soft ware and Gracenote Servers Gracenote re serves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Ser vers Including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agree ment against you directly in its own name The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The
144. audio Multilingual dialog Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi ple languages Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc letting you choose as desired Multi session Multi session is a recording method that al lows additional data to be recorded later When recording data on a CD ROM CD R or CD RW etc all data from beginning to end is treated as a Single unit or session Multi ses sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses sions in one disc Multi subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re corded on a single DVD letting you choose as desired Optical digital output By transmitting audio signals in a digital sig nal format the chance of sonic quality dete riorating in the course of transmission is minimized An optical digital output is de signed to transmit digital signals optically Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD R etc at the time required for a Tile just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs Parental lock Some DVD Video discs with violent or adult or iented scenes feature parental lock which pre vents children from viewing such scenes With this kind of disc if you set the unit s parental lock level playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled or these scenes will be skipped Point of Interest POI Point Of Interest any of a range of locations stored in the data such as railway stations shop
145. avigation system recognizes only the voice recognition characters registered in the current language If you change the in terface language the voice recognition character registered before you change the language will not be recognized 1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit mode gt For details refer to Switching to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch EB Asesqi DISNIAI a21N05S AY 24 buis p Chapter ED Using the AV Source Music Library 3 Enter a new character string and then touch OK The system pronounces the character once and the pronunciation confirmation message appears Touch Yes to fix the change No Returns to the detailed information screen Repeat You can listen to the pronunciation again O Ifthe pronunciation is not the desired one edit the characters so that the pronuncia tion matches your desired pronunciation 4 Touch Yes The changed character is fixed and the system returns to the previous screen Renaming an artist name in the playlist or track You can rename the artist name in the playlist or track 1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit mode gt For details refer to Switching to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch Artist 3 Touch Select from history List Keyboard Input The character input screen appears and you can change the artist name with the keyboard 4 Select an artist name from the list The artist name is changed t
146. aving period This turns the display below summer time On 02720 Abt 100 Summer ime 5 To finish the setting touch OK Customizing the keyboard layout You can select the type of keyboard to be used for inputting characters 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings 2 Touch Keyboard to select the layout that you want to use Each time you touch the key changes that set ting QWERTY default Changing the unit between km and miles This setting controls the unit of distance and speed displayed on your navigation system suoipuny UOI EHIAEN 104 SHhuljZas jesaUaH ay HulAjipo en 89 ED Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings 2 Touch km mile to change the setting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting mile default Show distance in miles Mile amp Yard Show distance in miles and yards km Show distance in kilometers Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle When calculating the expected time of arrival and the number of hours to the destination set the average speed for the freeway or ordin ary roads using and 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Regional Settings 2 Touch Average Speed 3 Touch or to set the speed Average Speed Minor Ordinary Road MES a5hph _
147. avoid talking on the phone as much as possible while driving If your cellular phone features Bluetooth technology this navigation system can be con nected to your cellular phone wirelessly Using this hands free function you can operate the navigation system to make or receive phone calls You can also transfer the phone book data stored in your cellular phone to the navi gation system This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology on the navigation system The following description assumes that the de vice name of the cellular phone to be con nected using Bluetooth wireless technology is set to My mobile phone Preparing communication devices To use the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology on the navigation system the Bluetooth unit ND BI1 sold separately is required Precautions for using a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology By connecting the Bluetooth unit sold sepa rately you can use the functions described in this manual including hands free phoning or phone book transfer To use these functions the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology that you want to connect must have a supported profile that is the same as the profile for the Bluetooth unit For the sup ported profile refer to the owner s manual of the Bluetooth unit O Please read Notes for hands free ph
148. avorite gt For details refer to Registering multiple tracks at a time on page 116 Operating the track edit mode Album playlist All items can be edited except for The edi ted contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard disk drive Be Back i Drive if Drive if PIDHEER TIME Rock Pop F Delete This Track My Mix playlist My Favorite playlist Only can be performed Drive it Drive if PIDHEER TIME Bock Pop Enter a desired track title gt For details refer to Changing the title of the playlist or track on the next page 2 Edit the pronunciation that is used asa voice command for voice recognition gt For details refer to Changing the pronuncia tion of a playlist name or track name on the next page 3 Enter a desired artist name gt For details refer to Renaming an artist name in the playlist or track on page 120 4 Change genre gt For details refer to Changing the genre of a track on page 122 Change the order to play back tracks Chapter Using the AV Source Music Library 13 gt For details refer to Sorting the tracks in My Mix My Favorite p ay ist on page 121 6 Delete the current track gt For details refer to De eting the current track on page 121 D Update track title information gt For details refer to Assigning another candi date for title information on page 122 Add the track to My Favori
149. be held liable for any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this material Chapter Introduction cH Data by Info USA 2007 All Rights Reserved Copyrigh z007 All Rights Reserved 2008 INCREMENT P CORP ALL RIGHTS RE SERVED About Gracenote Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the Industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com o racenote gt g CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote Grace note Software copyright 2000 2007 Grace note This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents is sued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Pow ered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote Gracenote End User License Agreement Version 20061005 This application or device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this appli cation to perform disc and or file identification and obtain music related inform
150. ble bit rate Generally speaking CBR constant bit rate is more widely used But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres sion it is possible to achieve compression priority sound quality Voice guidance The giving of directions by a recorded voice while in guidance mode Voice recognition The technology that allows the system to un derstand the driver s voice commands Waypoint A location that you choose to visit before your destination a journey can be built up from multiple way points and the destination 208 En Index ee 0 9 SHAY DING MOIE eap 192 REVNE SEIN SOU seat nt en etd ede 192 Balls igic aaveld ance eceer net eer rent mene ee oom 41 STE OO E E E T T 39 A Active touch panel key cccccccssserseseen 28 Address BOOK arere AAAA 60 82 Addres SAIC IN ense e a a hed aadede 28 ATU OE ara a aT To ATI COOU e EEES 113 AGIO ODETI ee arra E EA EAR 97 AOAO E ne a iu AKRO WG TUNIC WO aieo 30 AUO FOTO UC Mie aa easter lia ite eros asus oat 23 PUTO ROO U detente nei A a 198 A E a A 141 AV SUG Sal VIOGE neagirensiei 50 PS U asra n a aa meddoabeds 139 AV SCOS ME aaa eccrces 99 AVEG o EO aaa E 90 B Backoround FICC siasio A 93 EE O E E E A E E 154 BIU TOOU EITE cicuithcedamntatraadwnududehadtataicartasnnea TT el eevee nee Mae EE me Caner S E TATE A 109 BO E E E iach acetal ch saduleccsat 138 OU SINGS SCA a aA 83 CEMCSIIROULCS Aren oo CPER ER VV ea a n rte eaten
151. c or dirt scratches or condensation on the lens of this product Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the environment and the application set tings Please record with the correct for mat For details contact the manufacturer of the application Playback of CD R CD RW discs may be come impossible with direct exposure to sunlight high temperatures or depending on the storage conditions in the vehicle Titles and other text information recorded on a CD R CD RW disc may not be dis played by this product in the case of audio data CD DA x pu ddy Appendix E Appendix If you insert a CD RW disc into this pro duct it will take more time to play back than when you insert a conventional CD or CD R disc Read the precautions with CD R CD RW discs before using them MP3 files When naming an MP3 file add the corre sponding filename extension mp3 This navigation system plays back files with the filename extension mp3 as MP3 files To prevent noise and malfunctions do not use this extension for files other than MP3 files MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard This product allows playback of MP3 files on CD ROM CD R and CD RW discs Re corded discs can be played back if they are compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system It is possible to play bac
152. c button or function is indicated by its appearance Depending on the status of your vehicle some buttons will be available while others will not be Inactive touch panel key The function is not available e g operation is prohibited while driving Basic Navigation CAUTION For safety reasons you cannot use some of these basic navigation functions while your vehicle is in motion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake refer to Jo ensure safe driving on page 22 Basic flow of operation 1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake 2 Press MENU button to display the navi gation menu 3 Select the method of searching for your destination 28 En 4 Enter the information about your desti nation to calculate route 5 Confirm the location on the map 6 Check and decide the route 7 Your navigation system sets the route to your destination and the map of your surroundings appears 8 After releasing the parking brake drive in accordance with the navigation informa tion subject to the important safety in structions noted on Important Safety Information on page 21 and Additional Safety Information on page 22 Calculating your destination by using Address Search The most frequently used function is Address Search in which the address is specified and the destination is searched This section de sc
153. c loading slot 2 Touch Picture and then touch Import from Disc The list of the pictures stored in the CD R RW is displayed On this screen you can select the following item Back to Original The picture originally used when the system was purchased is selected O Touching an option other than Import from Disc allows you to select a back ground image stored on the hard disk drive Buluoud 32 1j spueH buisp En 85 ED Using Hands free Phoning 3 Touch a picture you want to set 4 Touch Yes On this screen you can select the following items No Select when you want to change to another picture Return to Step 3 Deleting data 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Phone Book 3 Touch Delete The Delete from Phone Book screen ap pears 4 Touch the entry you want to delete A red check mark appears next to the selected entry To cancel the selection touch the entry again Delete drem Phone Book 7 400 Mi FORS TUV WATI 5 Touch Delete 6 Touch Yes The data is deleted and the current location screen appears O To cancel the deletion touch No Editing the received call or dialed number history You can edit the data in the dialed number his tory or the received call history You can edit them and the edited entries are registered in the phone book You can also delete the his
154. cable correctly x fully ensured without speed Although it can be operated with Simple hy pulse brid mode without connecting the speed sig nal input the precision of the positioning will be less accurate Vibration detected Please The navigation unit is installed ina Re install the navigation unit in a place where power off the system and place where it may be affected bya the unit will not be affected by vibration check the installation Then large vibration please re boot the system and press OK Direction of G sensor is not Direction of G sensor is set incor See the Installation Manual and set the direc correct Please power off the rectly tion of the navigation unit correctly system and check the installa tion Then please re boot the system and press OK Gyro Sensor is not working Abnormal Gyrosensor output is de Write down the error code shown on the properly Please consult your tected screen Turn off the power and then contact dealer or Pioneer service cen your nearest Pioneer service facility ter Positioning is not possible The location display is not possible Consult your dealer due to the hardware Please due to hardware failure contact your dealer or Pioneer service center GPS antenna problem de The location display is not possible Consult your dealer tected Please contact your due to failure of the GPS antenna dealer or Pioneer service cen ter This function is not avai
155. cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch BEREE 4 Toend the call touch gg at the top right of the screen Dialing a facility s phone number You can make a call to facilities with phone number data Chapter Using Hands free Phoning dH 1 Perform POI Search or Vicinity Search and display the detail information gt For more details about Operation of POI Search refer to Searching for Points of Inter est POI Statewide on page 51 gt For more details about Operation of Vici nity Search refer to Finding a PO in the Vici nity on page 53 2 Touch 2 of the entry you want to call The detail screen appears 3 Touch to make a call Detaled P Information FIOMEER ELECTRONICS LORG BEACH FA feo EAST 220TH STREET 70952 2000 To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch BESHE 4 To end the call touch gg at the top right of the screen Dialing from the map You can make a call by selecting the icon of a registered location or a POI icon from the map screen O You cannot make a call to locations or POIs that have no phone number data 1 Scroll the map and place the cursor on an icon on the map 2 Touch B The detail screen appears 3 Touch to make a call To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch BESHE 4 Toend the call touch gg at the top right of the screen Transferring the phone book You can transf
156. ch Detour to search for an alterna tive route O Detour will be enable only when the sys tem can find traffic congestion After touching Detour the route is recalcu lated taking all traffic congestion on your cur rent route into account O Notification icon shows the nearest traffic information on the route However if you touch Detour the route is recalculated by taking into account not only this informa tion but also all traffic congestion informa tion on the route On this screen you can select the following items List Only three proximate traffic events on your route are listed in this traffic list Back The message disappears and the map display reappears For the subsequent operations see Checking for traffic congestion automatically gt For details refer to Checking for traffic con gestion automatically on the previous page Chapter Using Traffic Information CH Selecting traffic information to and go stopped traffic and closed blocked display roads There are different types of traffic information 5 Touch OK that can be received via the XM NavTraftic ser vice and you can select which types will be in corporated and displayed on your navigation system 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Traffic Settings 2 Touch Displayed Traffic information The names of the displayed traffic information items and a list of
157. cies are played back 16 kHz 22 05 KHz 24 kHz 32 KHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back e There is no m3u playlist compatibility e There is no compatibility with the MP3i MP3 interactive or MP3 PRO formats e The sound quality of MP3 files generally im proves with an increased bit rate This pro duct can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality we recommend only using discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps e Playing MP3 file on the DVD R RW is not supported About folders and MP3 files An outline of a CD ROM with MP3 files on it is shown below Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently selected O The following figure is an example of the tier structure in the CD The numbers in the figure indicate the order in which folder numbers are assigned and the order to be played back Indicates the order in which folder num bers are assigned Appendix Appendix c JJ Indicates each file The number is assigned in the order of the track to be played back x pu ddy t t t First tier 2 Second tier 3 Third tier Notes e This product assigns folder numbers The user can not assign folder numbers e f you are using a folder that does not contain an MP3 file the folder itself will display but you will not be able to see any files in the folder e M
158. cks NO SIGNAL is displayed at the While waiting fora response from Wait fora while and try the operation again right corner on the map the XM tuner You are in an area that cannot re Move into an area that can receive XM tuner ceive XM tuner reception reception Your current location provides very Change your location poor reception UPDATING is displayed atthe Service subscription is either XM Since the GEX P10XMT is capable of receiving right corner on the map audio only or XM NavTraffic stand both XM audio and XM NavTraffic service if alone you are subscribed to only one or the other the system checks to see if you have added another service to your account since you last powered on the navigation system When you subscribe to both services this message will stop appearing when you turn the ignition ON ACC ON Appendix gt Appendix Cables are not connected correctly No sounds are heard THevoltinie evel Will WORSE The system is performing still slow motion or frame by frame playback with DVD video Connect the cables correctly There is no sound during still slow motion or frame by frame playback with DVD video The system is paused or performing For an MP3 there is no sound on fast rewind fast rewind or forward during the MP3 disc playback DTS is selected for the DVD Video disc sound track The icon Q is displayed and op The operation is not compatible
159. cks in random order The selected tracks in the repeated range are randomly played O Random play may stop if you perform an operation that affects a track outside the repeating range or perform repeat play or scan play during track repeat play O When the range of repeat play is Track Repeat if you perform random play the repeating range changes to Playlist Repeat Indicator Implication Tracks of all playlists in the Random only group are played in random order Playlist Re Tracks in the selected play peat and Ran list are played in random dom order Scan play Scan play will be performed for the selected repeat range O When the range of repeat play is Track Repeat if you perform scan play the repeating range changes to Playlist Repeat T When you find the desired track touch EE to turn scan play off g After track or playlist scanning is fin ished normal playback of the tracks will begin again Indicator Implication The beginning of the first tracks of each playlist in the Scan ony group is played for about 10 seconds The beginning of each track Te in the selected playlist is n played for about 10 sec onds Searching a track from the playlist Once tracks are recorded the navigation sys tem categorizes them in a Group and sev eral types of playlists are automatically created A playlist is a list that shows the play back order of tracks gt For more details about
160. commercial item acquisitions as applicable In case of conflict between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions listed herein and this License the construction that provides greater lim itations on the Government s rights shall control Contractor manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America Inc 11 Lafayette Street Lebanon NH 03766 1445 Phone 603 643 0330 The Data is 1984 2007 by Tele Atlas ALL RIGHTS RESERVED For pur pose of any public disclosure provision under any federal state or local law it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and a proprietary commercial product and not subject to disclosure If you are an agency department or other entity of any State government the United States Government or any other public en tity or funded in whole or in part by the Uni ted States Government then you hereby agree to protect the Data from public disclo sure and to consider the Data exempt from any statute law regulation or code includ ing any Sunshine Act Public Records Act 8 Freedom of Information Act or equivalent which permits public access and or repro duction or use of the Data In the event that such exemption is challenged under any such laws this Agreement shall be consid ered breached and any and all right to retain any copies or to use of the Data shall be ter minated and considered immediately null and void Any copies of the Data held by you shall immediately be destroyed If any court o
161. corner of the sereen with the provided stylus Press video adjosinent key named W when complobod Press MAP button te exit this procedure oy 4 Press V button The adjusted position data is saved Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data O Press MAP button to complete the 4 point adjustment 5 Press V button The 16 point touch panel adjustment screen appears 6 Gently touch the center of mark dis played on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen After you touch all marks the adjusted posi tion data is saved Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data Press V button to return to the previous ad justment position To cancel the adjustment press MAP but Lor 7 Press MAP button The adjustment is complete If touch panel adjustment cannot be per formed properly consult your local Pioneer dealer Positioning Technology The navigation system accurately measures your current location by combining the posi tioning by GPS and by Dead Reckoning Positioning by GPS The Global Positioning System GPS uses a network of satellites orbiting the Earth Each of the satellites which orbit at a height of 68 900 000 feet 21 000 km continually broad casts radio signals giving time and position in formation This ensures that signals from at least three can be picked up from any open area on the ground s surface x ip
162. creen 1 When DVD is selected the following re strictions are applied to Rear display When a CD or MP3 disc is set in the built in DVD drive nothing is output O When AV is selected the following restric tions are applied to Rear display The Video image and sound are output only when AV INPUT has both video and sound The Video image and sound are output only when the appropriate setting on AV Input is Video Operating the picture adjustment CAUTION For safety reasons you cannot use some of these navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo tion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22 You can adjust the picture for each source and rear view camera 1 Press V button to display Picture Adjust screen Picture Adjust Brightness Contrast Color Hue Dimmer e Brightness Adjusts the black intensity e Contrast Adjusts the contrast e Color Adjusts the color saturation Chapter lensin Olpny YM pazejad Bungas olpny y Guiziwoysn gt en 153 Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual e Hue Adjusts the tone of color red is em phasized or green is emphasized e Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of dis play e Back Camera Shows the picture ad justment display for the rear view camera O Touching Source while adjustin
163. cting a source on page 97 O Also see Handling and Care of the Disc in the hardware manual and Detail Information for Playable Media on page 199 in this manual for more cautions about handling DVD Video Screen configuration Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Sound output indicator Shows which sound output setting has been selected 3 Repeat range indicator Shows which repeat range has been selected 4 Title number indicator Shows the title number currently playing Subtitle language indicator Shows what subtitle language has been se lected 6 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing D Audio language indicator Shows what audio language has been se lected Viewing angle indicator Shows what viewing angle has been selected 9 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current chapter Chapter Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio Cz Touch panel key operation pens fast rewind fast forward continues even if you release K lt 4 or BPI To resume playback at a desired point touch gt I a lt or BPI O You can also perform these operations hater Rape by using TRK lt button a Engl Pi th a Stop playback 4 Display the DVD menu You can display the menu by touching Menu or Top Menu while a disc is playing Touch ing either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location selected from the
164. cture Be sure to read Limitations for importing pic tures before creating a CD R RW and Pre cautions when changing the Splash Screen gt For details refer to Limitations for importing pictures on the next page gt For details refer to Precautions when chan ging the Splash Screen on page 95 In the menu operation screen you can custo mize a picture for the background Some pic tures are already stored in the hard disk drive and you can also import JPEG format pictures such as a picture from your digital camera by using a CD R RW You can use pictures as background pictures by burning them onto a CD R RW with your PC and inserting it into the navigation system The following types of background pictures can be changed e Splash Screen The screen that appears when the Navigation system starts up e Navigation Background Background pic ture of the navigation menu screen e AV Background Background picture dur ing the operation of audio source screen Chapter En 93 ED Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions Here a method for changing the background picture is described with an example of load ing a picture stored on a CD R RW onto the navigation system as the background picture 1 Check that no disc is inserted and in sert your CD R RW to the disc loading slot 2 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Background Picture Set
165. d pronunciation without modification gt For details refer to Available Voice Commands on page 159 3 Phone Enter the phone number to be displayed in the phone book Touch OK to complete the input and return to the previous screen Up to 32 characters can be input for the phone number 1 The edited names and phone numbers are reflected to the dialed number his tory and the received call history How ever they are not reflected to the data registered in Dial Favorites 4 Picture Sets the image to be displayed when a call iS received gt For details refer to Customizing the in coming call picture for a phone book entry on this page Customizing the incoming call picture for a phone book entry Be sure to read Limitations for importing pic tures before creating a CD R RW gt For details refer to Limitations for importing pictures on page 94 You can customize a picture for the phone book record Some pictures are already stored in the hard disk drive and you can also import JPEG format pictures such as a picture from your digital camera by using a CD R RW You can use pictures by burning them onto a CD R RW with your PC and insert that into the navigation system Here a method for changing the picture is de scribed with an example of loading a picture stored on a CD R RW onto the navigation system 1 Check that no disc is inserted and in sert your CD R RW to the dis
166. d with an asterisk show that these are default or factory settings Setting the Item on the Map Screen 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then touch Displayed Info The Displayed Info screen appears Close Up view City Map Tracking Display Show Mute Auito Show Traffic Incident 4 Second Manuver ATOW On this screen you can operate the following items 2 To finish the setting touch OK Close Up View You can select the method to display the close up view of the intersection e 2D 46 En Displays the close up view with the 2D map e 3D Displays the close up view with Driver s View e Off Does not display the close up view City Map You can select whether to display the city map when in certain metropolitan city areas e On Automatically switches to the city map when in a city map area e Off Does not show the city map O Even if you switch City Map to On city map cannot display in areas where there is no city map data Tracking Display You can trace locations that you have already passed with white dots on the route e On Always Displays tracking for all journeys e On This journey Displays tracking dots but erases them when the navigation system is turned off when turning off the engine of your vehi cle e Off Does not display tracking dots Show Mute Button Selects whether to display or hide the voice guidance mute key on the map
167. de on page 152 2 Recording progress indicator Shows the progress of the recording Frac tions show number of recorded tracks total number of tracks in the CD 3 Recording indicator 110 En Shows the recording status Red indi cates that recording is in progress Blue indicates preparing recording 4 Source icon Shows which source has been selected Track indicator Shows the number and title of the track cur rently playing 6 Artist name indicator Shows the name of the artist currently play ing when available 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track Track list Shows tracks in the CD Record status of tracks H Recorded track iz Red Track being recorded g Blue Track is not recorded yet O Track selection operation or special play back functions such as random play are disabled until recording finishes To se lect tracks or perform special playback functions touch Stop to stop record ing Title display Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com O Title information will be displayed when the information is found in the Gracenote Da tabase on the built in hard disk drive If you insert a CD TEXT disc the system priori tized a title information encoded in CD TEAT dis
168. dicator Shows the number of the song playing in the selected list 3 Repeat play indicator Shows whether Repeat is selected for the cur rent song or all songs on current list 4 Shuffle play indicator Shows whether Shuffle play is selected for songs of aloums Album title indicator Shows the title of the album for the song Artist name indicator Shows the name of the artist of the current song D Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current song Song title indicator Shows the title of the current song 9 Playing Song Information Shows the information and status of the cur rent song Song title Artist name and Album title in dicator When playing a song Song title Artist name and Album title are displayed Touch panel key operation Touch the source icon and then touch iPod to select the iPod When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch panel keys S Gist Kis CD Onn O01 Keen Ya Head Greatoet Hite JO Ones Keep Ya Head Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause 2 Touch Skip back or forward to another song Touching gt l skips to the start of the next song Touching k lt once skips to the start of the current song Touching again will skip to the previous song Touch and hold fast forward or rewind O You can also perform these operation with pressing TRK lt bu
169. ding the separation mark and a file ex tension Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies Extended formats Joliet File names can have up to 64 characters Romeo File names can have up to 128 characters Linear PCM LPCM Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs Generally DVDs are re corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs Therefore DVDs can provide higher sound quality m3u Playlists created using the WINAMP soft ware have a playlist file extension m3u Menu A list of options shown on the display choices are selected touching the display MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 It is an audio compression standard set by a working group MPEG of the ISO International Stan dards Organization MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1 10th the size of a con ventional disc MPEG This stands tor Moving Pictures Experts Group and is an international video image compression standard Some DVDs feature di gital audio compressed and recorded using this system Appendix Appendix c Multi angle With regular TV programs although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles let ting you choose your viewing angle as desired Multi
170. drive has occurred such as internal elec trical problem or file system error Keep turning the target phone s Bluetooth wireless technology on during the registra tion Operate the target phone and accept the re gistration request from the navigation system Furthermore check the connection settings on your cellular phone Retry the registration and if the registration still fails try registering using your cellular phone e Wait for a while and retry e Establish that connection temporarily and retry that later Establish that connection temporarily and retry it later e Turn the target phone s Bluetooth wireless technology on e Check whether your cellular phone is turned off and whether the distance to your cellular phone is too far e Check the connection and retry e Establish that connection temporarily and retry later e Check the connection and retry e Establish that connection temporarily and retry later Wait for a while and retry Select just a suitable item format and then retry Connect your cellular phone again and retry Please read the instruction of touch panel ca libration and retry Page 190 Consult your dealer Consult your dealer Appendix Appendix c Failure of the built in hard disk drive Consult your dealer There is no applicable pro has occurred such as internal elec gram trical problem or file system error The HDD cannot be operat
171. e O When multiple options for the title informa tion are found or no title information exists is displayed A title may be displayed if you update the title information manually after recording has finished gt For details refer to Assigning another candidate for title information on page 122 Chapter Using the AV Source Music Library 13 O If no title information exists in the Grace note Database on the built in hard disk drive the date when the track was recorded is entered automatically If you want to dis play the title information enter the title manually after recording has finished gt For more details about Changing the title of the playlist or track refer to Editing a playlist or tracks on page 117 O The title information displayed on the CD playback screen and the recording screen is synchronized with the one edited in the music library If you edit the title informa tion in the music library the title displayed on each screen will change accordingly gt For details refer to Editing a playlist or tracks on page 117 Title information can only be edited when one or more tracks are recorded in the music library O Once you record a CD TEXT disc the title information encoded in CD TEXT disc is also stored into the hard disk drive If you edit the title information with the Music li brary the edited title will be shown Recording all tracks in a CD When you play back a CD that is not
172. e on Address Book 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Telephone Search The telephone number entry screen appears 2 Input a telephone number ae a einai Enter Phone Humber Phone When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately gt For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 When the route is already set Location confir mation screen is shown gt For details refer to Calculating your destina tion by using Address Search on page 28 O If there is more than one place for the num ber input a list of those places is displayed Touch the item you want in the list Route Calculation to Your Home Location or to Your Favorite Location If your home location is registered the route home can be calculated by touching a single key from the navigation menu Also you can register one location such as your workplace as your favorite location and the route is cal culated in a similar way gt For details refer to Registering your home and your favorite location on page 58 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Return Home or Go to When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately gt For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 When the route is already set Location confir mation screen is shown gt For details refer to Ca culating your destina tion by
173. e vehicle 90 Checking the Setting Related with Hardware 90 Checking the connections of leads and installation positions 90 Checking sensor learning status and driving status 91 C4 En Correcting the installation angle 92 Checking the device and version information 92 Checking the hard disk information 92 Registering the Home Location and Favorite Location 93 Changing the Background Picture 93 Limitations for importing pictures 94 Precautions when changing the Splash Screen 95 Using the Demonstration Guidance 95 Correcting the Current Location 95 Restoring the Default Setting 96 Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio Basic Operation 97 Switching the Audio operation screen 97 Selecting a source 97 About Steering Remote Control 98 Viewing the audio operation screen and displaying the Audio Settings menu 99 Operating a Music CD 99 Selecting CD as the source 99 About auto hard disk recording 100 Screen configuration 100 ouch panel key operation 101 Operating the CD ROM MP3 disc 101 Selecting ROM asthe source 102 Screen configuration 102 Touch panel key operation 102 Notes on playing MP3 disc 104 Operating the DVD 104 Selecting DVD asthe source 104 Screen configuration 104 Touch panel key operation 105 Contents an Searching for a desired scene starting playback from a specified time 106 Enterin
174. e GPS antenna GPS reception may Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by be lost temporarily combining GPS Dead Reckoning and map matching However in some situations these functions may not work properly and the error may become bigger Appendix gt Appendix e Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint or car wax because this may block the reception of GPS signals Snow buildup can also degrade the signals so keep the antenna clear O If for any reason GPS signals cannot be re ceived learning and error correction are not possible If GPS positioning has been operating for only a short time your vehi cle s actual position and the current loca tion mark on the map may diverge considerably Once GPS reception is re stored accuracy will be recovered Vehicles that Cannot Obtain Speed Pulse Data O The speed pulse data comes from the speed sensing circuit The location of this speed sensing circuit depends on your ve hicle model In some cases it is impossible to make a connection to it and in sucha case we recommend that ND PG1 speed pulse generator sold separately be used Conditions Likely to Cause Noticeable Positioning Errors For various reasons such as the state of the road you are traveling on and the state of re ception of the GPS signal the actual position of your vehicle may differ from the position displayed on the map screen e f you make a shallow turn amp
175. e is switched to another e Power Ihe antenna extends or turns on when the ignition switch is turns on The antenna is stored or turned off when the ignition switch is turned off Touch Auto ANT in System Settings menu Touching Auto ANT switches between Radio and Power O Regardless of whether Radio or Power is selected turning off the ignition switch will cause the antenna to automatically re tract or turn off Setting the clock display on the video image You can select whether to display the clock on the video image screen without touch panel keys such as DVD Video AV INPUT or TV tuner Touch Clock DISP in System Settings menu Touching Clock DISP switches between All SCRN and Audio SCRN e All SCRN The clock is overlaid on the Video image e Audio SCRN The clock is not overlaid on the Video image Chapter lensin Olpny ym pazejas Bungas olpny y Huiziwioysn gt Chapter Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Setting the CD recording mode You can set whether to start recording tracks automatically when you play a CD or to manu ally trigger recording Touch REC Mode in System Settings menu Each touch of REC Mode changes the set tings as follows e Auto Records the tracks automatically when a CD is played e Manual Lets you select the tracks you want to record manually and records them e Single Automatically r
176. e map on page 83 3 Touch Back Returns to the previous display 4 Touch ga Returns to the map of your surroundings O You can also return to the map of your sur roundings by pressing MAP button Chapter How to Read the Map Display 04 Shortcut menu Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks such as route calculation for the location indi cated by the scroll cursor or registering a loca tion in Address Book faster than using the navigation menu You can customize the shortcuts displayed on screen Ihe shortcuts described here are pre pared as the default setting gt For more details about Changing a short cut refer to Se ecting the Shortcut on page 48 O When the Bluetooth unit sold separately is connected to the navigation system you can use shortcuts related to phone func tions O Items marked with an asterisk cannot be removed from Shortcut menu When the map is asin touch 4 call Shortcut menu WJ Route Options Displayed when the map is not scrolled This item can be selected only during route gul dance You can modify the conditions for route calcu lation and recalculate the current route gt For details refer to Modifying the Route Cal culation Conditions on page 34 EJ Destination Displayed when the map is scrolled Set the route to the place specified with the scroll cur sor EA Registration Register information on the location i
177. e navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen appears 3 Touch Device Name 4 Touch any key to enter the name you want to set and then touch OK gt For details refer to Calculating your destina tion by using Address Search on page 28 O Up to 20 characters can be entered for a de vice name Editing the password You can change the password to be used for authentication on your cellular phone De fault is 1111 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen appears 3 Touch Password 80 En 4 Touch any key to enter the password you want to set and then touch OK gt For details refer to Calculating your destina tion by using Address Search on page 28 O Four to eight characters can be entered for a password Receiving a phone call You can use the navigation system to receive a call hands free The map screen shows the icon while your cel lular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless tech nology is connected You can receive a hands free call only when the cellular phone is con nected Connecting icon Answering an incoming call The system informs you that it is receiving a call by displaying a message and producing a ring sound once 1 When there is an incoming call touch When there is an incoming call you can reject the call by touchi
178. e non fading output setting is on the audio signal does not pass through navigation system s low pass filter for the subwoofer but is output through the RCA output 1 Touch Non Fading in Audio Settings menu Only when Preout the subwoofer controller setting in System Settings menu is Full you can select Non Fading gt For details refer to Setting the rear outout and subwoofer controller on page 152 2 Touch On to turn non fading output on To turn non fading output off touch Off 3 Touch or to adjust the output level of the non fading 6 to 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low and high sound ranges at low volume 1 Touch Loudness in Audio Settings menu 2 Touch On to turn loudness on To turn loudness off touch Off Chapter lensin Olpny ym pazejad Bungas olpny y Guiziwioysn gt Chapter Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual 3 Touch lt or gt to select a desired level Each time you touch lt or gt selects level in the following order Low Mid High Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers turn HPF high pass filter on Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers 1 Touch HPF in Audio Settin
179. e output during gg You can start voice operation any time even when the map screen is displayed or audio is operated Some operations are not available The basic steps of voice operation are as fol Navigation screen lows SLAEN AVE ee Touch VOICE icon 1 Touch VOICE icon to activate voice op eration vy 2 Speak a command into the microphone after the beep o GFEORD AVENTIS TO PARO ary Th ua Audio screen sound veon foul y ee i Drivel T PWHEER TIME oe ao May Por ovived Tires Media r O7 Eyo le oye i EERS D3 intepraton i ld PREMIER ro Ss Di Brilian AY Sottings 156 En Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 18 O Depending on the operating state of the na vigation system Some commands dis played in Voice Help may be unavailable Available commands are in white and una vailable commands are in gray When using voice operation for the first time Until you are familiar with this system it is re commended that you stop the vehicle in a safe place and refer to the commands displayed in the Voice Help menu a list of the words you can speak When your vehicle is parked with the parking brake on see the Voice Help menu and speak voice command on that menu except for some cases Voice Help menu Basic Operation Destination Man Operaton Roule Gabons Traffic Information Call Gther Operator a Dear ation VOICE icon
180. e the signals Signals from the vehicle s speed Check that the cables are properly connected pulse are not being picked up prop If necessary consult the dealer that installed erly the system The navigation system may notbe Check that the navigation system is securely mounted securely in your vehicle mounted and if necessary consult the dealer that installed the system x pu ddy Your vehicle is operating in Simple Connect the speed signal input pink lead hybrid mode wire of the power cable correctly and reset the 3D Hybrid Sensor memory Learning Status The navigation system is installed Confirm the installation angle The naviga with an extreme angle exceeding tion system must be installed within the al the limitation of the installation lowed installation angle For details refer to angle Installation Manual and Installation Angle Setup Page 92 Indication of the position of your ve Check whether or not the reverse gear signal hicle is misaligned after a U turn or input lead violet is connected properly The reversing navigation system works properly without the lead connected but positioning accuracy will be adversely affected The map continually reorients it The traveling direction is always set Touch gon the screen and change the map self to Heading Up display The daylight display is used Day is selected to Day Night Dis Check Day Night Display setting and
181. e yellow charac ters in the text box Suggested characters in white are invalid Touch the desired facility in the list to proceed to the next step 1 When the options are narrowed down to six or less a list of the matching facilities auto matically appears When you enter the same characters that were entered pre viously the system automatically displays the character string that follows the entered characters Auto fill in function gt For details refer to Auto fill in function on page 30 O If less than six POIs in a detailed category are available the screen for inputting the POI name is skipped UO EUI S9G Inoa 0 3 NOY e 6ul 9S en 51 Chapter KD Setting a Route to Your Destination Please proceed to Step 4 4 Touch paN Touching WAAS sorts the items in the list in the order of distance CALIFORNIA 3 i z we Dist zamu H Ea TE cELoorapo shoe 789 mis Wi E ELDORADO SMOG ELDORADO soe 170 unio Ba E haz Sorts the items in the list in the alphabetical order O You can use this sort function only when there are 2000 or less candidates 5 Touch the desired POI for your destina tion PAI CALIFORNIA 3 ELDORADO Swon my 170 mu ee i r mami We E cist E ELDORADO shot ME eLporano slog 79 omis Ba E O Icons are helpful for quickly telling the cate gory of facilities with the same name When the route is not set route calculation starts immediately gt
182. eception Status of the XM Tuner on page 72 Current time 4D Estimated time of arrival or travel time to your destination The display alternates by pressing It O The estimated time of arrival is an ideal value calculated based on the value set for Average Speed and the actual driving speed The estimated time of ar rival is only a reference value and does not guarantee arrival at that time gt For details refer to Changing the vir tual soeed of the vehicle on page 90 2 Tracking dot The tracking dot shows the route your vehicle has traveled by white dots gt For more details about Select the tracking setting refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46 3 Map of your surroundings Side map Touching the screen changes the map to the Scroll mode 42 En gt For details refer to Scro the map to the lo cation you want to see on the next page Distance to a turning point Displayed on the enlarged intersection map The green bar gets shorter as your vehicle ap proaches a turning point 5 Next direction of travel When you approach an intersection it ap pears green The screen displays the distance to the next guidance point Direction line The direction towards your destination or scroll cursor is indicated with a straight line 7 Lane information Lane information is displayed the first time there is a voice guidance on your route The white arrow on the green background indi c
183. ecords only the first track of the CD Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller The navigation system s rear output can be used for full range speaker or Subwoofer con nection If you switch Rear SP setting to Sub W you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxili ary amp Initially the navigation system is set for rear fullrange speaker connection When rear out put is connected to full range speakers when Rear SP setting is Full you can connect the RCA subwoofer output SUBWOOFER OUT PUT or NON FADING OUTPUT to a subwoofer In this case you can select whether to use the subwoofer controller s low pass filter phase built in amp of the navigation system or the auxiliary amp or subwoofer O If you change the subwoofer controller Rear SP or Preout Sub Woofer or Non Fading in Audio Settings menu re turn to the factory settings O Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting O Rear SP can be set only when the source is OFF 1 Touch Rear SP in System Settings menu 152 En 2 Touch Full or Sub W to switch the rear output setting 1 When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output select Full When a subwoofer is connected to the rear speaker leads di rectly select Sub W 3 Touch Preout to switch the subwoofer output or non fading output When Rear SP setting is Sub W Preout
184. ectronics Retailer BEST BUY CIRCUIT CITY COMP USA FRY S ELEC TRONICS RADIO SHACK ULTIMATE ELECTRONICS Electronics Retailer Others Category name Groceries Liquor Store Bakery Butcher Convenience Store De licatessen Groceries Others Category name Shopping Shopping Center Beauty amp Barber Book Store Music Store Fashion Florist Furniture Home Improvement Glassware House amp Office Optometrist Shoes amp Bags Sporting Goods Toys Cellular Phone Shop Shopping Others Category name Entertainment Stadium amp Arena Brewery Casino Cinema Night Club Theater amp Play Winery Pub JIOA YZIM Wa sSAs UOI eEHIAeN nog Huljessdo Category name Leisure Museum Art Gallery Zoo Amusement Park Fair Ground Beach National Park amp Forest Camping amp Hiking Ski Resort Bowling Golf Course Gym Pool amp Tennis Travel Agency Tourist Information Tourist At traction Park amp Recreation Category name Public Service amp Facility Police Station Government Office Post Office Court House Convention Center City Center Library Category name Transportation Airline Access Airport Ferry Terminal Train Station Rest Area Appendix E Appendix Troubleshooting If you have problems operating your navigation system refer to this section The most common problems are listed below along with likely causes and solutions While this list is not com
185. ed back The loaded disc is a type this system cannot play The parking brake lead is not con nected or applied Parking brake interlock is activated AV Input setting is incorrect Have both speakers pause slightly before speaking e Overwrite the old registered phone with a new phone e Clear Phone Settings Page 187 Insert the disc with the label upward Clean disc Inser a normal round disc Check the file format Replace disc Check what type the disc is Also see Hand ling and Care of the Disc in the hardware manual and Page 199 for more cautions about handling each type of media Connect a parking brake lead correctly and apply the parking brake Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake Page 22 Please read the following page and set the setting correctly Page 150 Appendix Appendix c The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly The audio skips secured Failure hard disk drive Consult your Pioneer dealer Rear display picture disap The setting for REAR SCREEN is in Please read the following page and set the pears correct rear screen setting correctly Page 153 There was a problem with the Rear Check the Rear display and its connection display or a faulty wiring connec tion for example When the shift lever is in R the Select DVD or AV in REAR SCREEN
186. ed Hard disk drive cannot run due to Park your vehicle to safe place turn the igni due to excessive heat Please high temperature tion switch off and wait until the temperature move your vehicle to a safe inside the vehicle drops place and turn the power off until the temperature goes down x pu ddy Appendix E Appendix Messages for Audio Functions When problems occur in the audio source a message may appears on the display Refer to the table below to identify the problem then take the suggested corrective action If the error persists contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center Built in DVD drive Message When What to do See Unreadable disc If you try to use a disc which isin Insert a suitable disc compatible with this system If you insert a disc upside down Insert the disc with the label upward If the disc is dirty Clean the disc If the disc is cracked or otherwise Insert anormal round disc damaged Mechanical failure of DVD drive oc Consult your Pioneer dealer Curs Playback error Please remove Electrical or mechanical error has Press RESET button Also see the Hardware the disc occurred Manual Page 187 Region code error The disc does not have the same re Replace the DVD Video with one bearing the gion number as the navigation sys correct region number tem Playback error due to irregu The temperature of the built in DVD Park your vehicle in safe place tur
187. ed by Tele Atlas directly against you About the Data for the Map Database e This database was developed and recorded up to May 2007 Changes to streets high 18 En ways made after that time may not be re flected in this database e tis strictly prohibited to reproduce and use any part or the whole of this map in any form without permission from the copyright owner e ifthe local traffic regulations or conditions deviate from this data follow the local traf fic regulations such as signs indications etc and conditions Such as construction weather etc e The traffic regulation data used in the map database applies only to standard sized passenger vehicles Note that regulations for larger vehicles motorbikes and other non standard vehicles are not included in the database Copyright 1984 2007 Tele Atlas Rel 03 2006 NOTICE 2001 2007 Tele Atlas All rights reserved This material is proprietary and the subject of copyright protection and other intellectual property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of se lected Statistics Canada computer files under Agreement number 6776 and is an authorized distributor of selected Geomatics Canada computer files The product includes informa tion copied with permission trom Canadian authorities including Canada Post Corporation The use of this material is subject to the terms of a License Agreement You will
188. ed depending on the vehi cle Checking sensor learning status and driving status 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Hardware 2 Touch 3D Calibration Status The 3D Calibration Status screen appears DETAnce M mila Speed Pulse 0 Learning Status Sensor betalona 1 Distance Driving distance is indicated 2 Speed Pulse Total number of speed pulses is indicated 3 Learning Status Current driving mode is indicated 4 Degree of learning Sensor learning situations for distance Distance right turn Right Turn left turn Left Turn and 3D detection 3D are indi cated by the length of bars 1 When tires have been changed or chains fitted turning on the Speed Pulse allows the system to detect the fact that the tire diameter has changed and automatically replaces the value for calculating distance O If ND PG1 is connected the distance calculation value cannot be replaced automatically Speed The speed detected by the navigation sys tem is indicated This indication may be different from the actual speed of your vehi cle so please do not use this instead of the speedometer 6 Acceleration or deceleration Rotational speed Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your vehicle is indicated Also rotational speed when your vehicle turns to left or right is shown Inclination Degree of slope of the street that you are currently running is indicated
189. eddish 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu 2 Touch Road Color to change the set ting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting Blue Changes to blue based map colors Red Changes to red based map colors O Check the color change with Map Legend Set whether to automatically switch to the na vigation screen from the AV screen when your vehicle approaches a guidance point such as an intersection while displaying a screen other than navigation 50 En Chapter Setting a Route to Your Destination 06 A CAUTION For safety reasons these route setting functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route refer to 70 ensure safe driving on page 22 O Some information on traffic regulations de pends on the time when the route calcula tion is performed Thus the information may not correspond with a certain traffic regulation when your vehicle actually passes the location Also the information on the traffic regulations provided will be for a passenger vehicle and not for a truck or other delivery vehicles Always follow the actual traffic regulations when driving Searching for Points of Interest POI Statewide Information about various facilities Points Of Interest POI such as gas stations amuse ment parks or restaurants is available By en tering the P
190. efault Address Book entry Register other points you often visit here Once locations are registered you can set the route by selecting an item from Ad dress Book O The items in Address Book are automati cally updated in alphabetic order However Home location and Favorite location always appear at the top if you registered them O Selects whether to display or hide all of the registered location icons on the map gt For details refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46 58 En Registering your home and your favorite location You can register one home location and one favorite location You can change the regis tered information later You might find it useful to register your workplace or a relative s home as your favorite location 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Defined Locations 2 Touch Go to When registering your home location touch Home Set Home and Ge To 3 Search for a location to register You can select a method of location search Ageress Pol M sees E arch a ey ae Weacdrese 9 Postination Feiephons WP yicinity Bock oe Baer Starch wc p gt For more details about Address Search refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28 gt For more details about Information on searching locations to register refer to Chap ter 6 O Ifyou select Map Search move the scroll cu
191. er the data from the phone book stored in your cellular phone to the phone book stored in the navigation system By transferring the phone book to the naviga tion system you can browse the data in the transferred phone book on the screen of the navigation system You can also select the en tries in the phone book to make a call from the navigation system or edit the data on the navi gation system O Depending on the cellular phone Phone Book may be called a name such as Con tacts Business card or something else O The Phone Book can hold a total of 400 en tries O The Hands free phoning connection is dis connected to establish the connection for phone book transfer When the phone book is transferred hands free phoning is recon nected automatically O The phone book of this navigation system cannot assign the multiple telephone num bers for one person s name 1 Connect your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology gt For details refer to Registering your cellular phone on page 78 2 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 3 Touch Read Bus Card If there is a phone book already transferred the following screen appears Buluoud 32 1j spueH Buisn Chapter ED Using Hands free Phoning Do you want to erase the phone book before recewina business cards Yes Deletes all phone numbers stored in the phone book and then transfer
192. er to the navigation system turns off inap propriate content may have been recorded in the memory or the hard disk drive In such a case normal operations may be restored by clearing the setting values stored in the hard disk drive 1 Start the engine After a few moments the start up screen comes on for a few seconds 2 Touch and hold MAP button while the start up screen is displayed Clear memory screen appears 3 Touch Reset 4 Touch Yes The setting values stored in the hard disk drive return to the default or factory settings After that the navigation splash screen appears Completely returning the navigation system to the initial state To return the entire navigation system to the default or factory settings initialize the naviga tion system in the following order 1 Press RESET button on the hardware 2 Initialize the user data area on the hard disk drive 3 Clear the learned data in the sensor 1 Turn the ignition switch off 2 Press RESET button 3 Start the engine After a few moments the start up screen comes on for a few seconds 4 Touch and hold MAP button while the start up screen is displayed Clear memory screen appears 190 En 5 Touch Clear user information from hard disk O This reset operation clears all music data recorded in the music library Note that the cleared data cannot be restored 6 Touch Yes The user area in the hard disk drive is initia l
193. era images will be displayed in rear view mode while you are moving forward O If the camera is set always On it can dis play images in rear view mode when the ve hicle is moving forward In that case you should ask the camera maker or dealer whether the camera s functions or lifetime would be affected O Rear View can be displayed at all times e g when monitoring an attached trailer as a split screen where map information is partially displayed Please beware that in this setting camera image is not resized to fit to screen and that a portion of camera image may not be viewable 40 En Enlarged map of the intersection This screen is displayed only when Close Up View in Map menu is 2D or 3D Enlarged map of the intersection 2D E FLORENCE AVE Display during freeway driving In certain locations of the freeway lane infor mation is available indicating the recom mended lane to be in to easily maneuver the next guidance Chapter How to Read the Map Display 04 While driving on the freeway freeway exit numbers and freeway signs may be displayed when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits 14 O If the data for these items is not contained in the hard disk drive the information is not available even if there are the signs on the actual road City Map When City Map in Map menu is On in certain metropolitan city areas a more de tailed City Map is available at t
194. eration is not possible with the DVD s configuration The picture stops pauses and Reading of data has become impos the unit cannot be operated sible during DVD playback The picture is stretched the as The aspect setting is incorrect for pect is incorrect the display A parental lock message is dis Parental lock is on played and DVD playback is not possible Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect cannot be canceled Playback is not with the audio The DVD playing does not feature language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language settings selected in DVD V selected in DVD V Setup Setup Dialing is not possible because Your phone is out of range for ser the touch panel keys for dialing vice are inactive The connection between cellular phone and the Bluetooth unit sold separately navigation system can not be established now The cellular phone is not registered to the navigation system yet When the screen is frozen Park your vehicle in a safe place and cut off the engine Turn the ignition key back to Acc off Then start the engine again and turn the power to the navigation system back on If this does not solve the problem press RESET but ton on the navigation system 178 En or forward Switch to a non DTS sound track This operation is not possible For example the DVD playing does not feature that angle audio system subt
195. ere you can receive the XM NavTraffic information and then try the operation again 94 Try re reading the data by inserting a clean CD R Clean the pick up lens with a commer cially available cleaning kit for DVD then try to reading again Use the appropriate data after reading Page 94 Use the appropriate data after reading Page 94 Confirm once more that their connections are correct Turn the target phone s Bluetooth wireless technology on Cancel the pairing connection and retry Operate the target phone and accept the con nection request from the navigation system Furthermore check the connection settings on your cellular phone Check whether your cellular phone is turned off and whether the distance to your cellular phone is too far Retry the registration and if a connection still cannot be established try connecting using your cellular phone x pu ddy Appendix E Appendix Registration failed Automatic connection in pro gress Please try again later Automatic connection in pro gress Please try manually later Could not find any available phone Bluetooth unit error It is not possible to find any cell phones Bluetooth unit error The de vice name could not be set Registration is not available Reading failed Calibration failed Please refer The touch panel calibration has not been carried out with appropriate to the owner s man
196. erform fast forward rewind during Track Repeat the repeat play is can celed O Ifyou select another folder or perform fast forward rewind during Folder Repeat the repeat play is can celed You can perform track search within that folder with Folder repeat O When Folder Repeat is selected it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder 9 Play tracks in random order Touching switches between playing tracks randomly or sequentially within a se lected repeat range Scan folders and tracks Touching BE turns the scan play on or off Scan play will be performed for the selected repeat range O In default the beginning of the first track of each folder will be played for about 10 seconds When Folder Repeat is selected for repeat play the beginning of each track in the selected folder will play for about 10 sec onds When you find the desired track touch gill to turn scan play off O After track or folder scanning is fin ished normal playback of the tracks will begin again En Chapter olpey pue ana GAG UI 1Ng a24n0S AY a4 Bursn a ED Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio Notes on playing MP3 disc O When playing discs with MP3 files and audio data CD DA such as CD EXTRA and MIXED MODE CDs both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3 and CD DA When playing back the CD DA part the operation is the same as for normal music CDs Likewise
197. erform the operation such as resuming stored in the disc When using a DVD that has a point recorded that indicates where to return to the DVD re turns to the specified point and begins play back from that point Switch to the previous page of touch panel keys 5 Select the DVD menu item Decide the item When you select a certain video item play back starts from the selected item When you select an item with a submenu the next menu screen will appear O The way to display the menu differs de pending on the disc For details refer to the instructions provided with disc 106 En Searching for a desired scene starting playback froma specified time You can search for a desired scene by specify ing atitle or a chapter and the time O Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped 1 Touch 10Key Search and then touch Title title Chapter chapter Time time i E iien aF E a Pia Ur Mu io Entar Clear tirade 2 Touch the keys to input the desired number For titles chapters e Jo select 3 touch 3 e Jo select 10 touch 1 and 0 in order e Jo select 23 touch 2 and 8 in order For time time search e Jo select 21 minutes 03 seconds touch 2 1 Min and 3 Sec in order e Jo select 71 minutes 00 seconds touch 7 1 Min in order O To cancel the input numbers touch Clear 3 While the input number is displa
198. f competent jurisdiction considers this clause void and unenforceable in whole or in part for any reason this Agreement shall be considered terminated and null and void in its entirety and any and all copies of the Data shall immediately be destroyed Additional Provisions with respect to POI Data only a No Creation of Mailing Lists You are prohibited from using the POls i to create mailing lists or ii for other such si milar uses b Compliance You will use the POls in compliance with all applicable federal state and local laws rules and regulations c ndemnification You shall indemnity and hold infoUSA Inc harmless against all third party claims or liability which are based in whole or in part of the users failure to comply with such laws rules and regulations or which result from the use of the POIs through you d Warranty In addition to the Warranties contained in the Agreement YOU UNDERSTAND THAT THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN AS S BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE AND THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES MADE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE e POls Segregation uoIpnpo u KD Introduction You are prohibited from combining or mer ging the POIs with any other POI data The POls shall be maintained in such a way that they are separately identifiable from all other POI data at all times
199. f the picture en abling you to enjoy a 4 3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen Cinema cinema A picture is enlarged by the same proportion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between Full and Zoom in the vertical direction ideal for a cinema sized picture wide screen pic ture where captions lie outside the frame Zoom zoom A 4 3 picture is enlarged in the same propor tion both vertically and horizontally ideal for a cinema sized picture wide screen picture Different settings can be memorized for each video source When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original as pect ratio it may appear differently O Remember that use of this system for com mercial or public viewing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author s rights protected by the Copyright Law O Video may appear grainy when viewed in Cinema or Zoom mode O The navigation map and the rear view cam era picture is always Full Setting for rear view camera The following two functions are available The rear view camera feature requires a separately sold rear view camera e g ND BC2 For de tails consult your dealer Camera for backing up The navigation system features a function that automatically switches to the full screen rear camera image installed on your vehicle When the shift lever is in the REVERSE R position the
200. fer to Searching for POIs by specifying a category first on the previous page Finding a POI in the Vicinity Searching for the facilities around the current position You can search for Points Of Interest in your surroundings Use this function to find a POI to visit during a journey Searching range is approximately 10 miles 16 km square from the current location 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Vicinity Search The list of POI categories appears 2 Touch the desired category Category Previously set categories will have a red check mark When only a few types of the detailed categories are selected blue check marks will appear OK Start search with the selected category Back Returns to the previous screen Set Displays the screen for registering POI short CLS gt For details refer to Registering deleting POI Shortcuts on page 56 UO1 CUI S9G Inoa 0 3 NOY e 6ul 9S Chapter KD Setting a Route to Your Destination O Ifyou touch one of the POI shortcuts e g wT before selecting a category on the list you can start searching for facilities di rectly by the category registered on the POI shortcut O Ifyou want to search for facilities by using both marked category and POI shortcuts select some categories in the list and then touch the POI shortcut to start searching 3 Touch Select Detail p Solort All Deselect All Pie Punic Service
201. ffic On Route 66 Address Book Icon 46 Traffic Events 65 3D Landmark 46 Traffic Flow 6 Short Cut Selection 48 Traffic Settings 69 Overlay POI 49 Phone Menu Map Legend 49 View Mode 49 Day Night Display 50 202 En Appendix Appendix c AV Guide Mode 50 Shortcut menu Road Color O 50 The shortcuts displayed on screen can be Customized 1 Items marked with an asterisk cannot Settings menu be removed from Shortcut menu Dstt oration ap For details refer to Se ecting the Shortcut on ee la age 48 Volume Regional Hardware Defined Backeround p 9 Settings Locations Picture eo Shortcut menu Demo i 3 Volume 88 Route Condition 34 5 Regional Settings Avoid Toll Road 34 3 Time 89 Avoid Freeway 34 Keyboard 89 Time restrictions 34 km mile 89 Learning Route 34 Average Speed 90 A Registration 59 Hardware Wi Vicinity Search 54 Connection Status 90 l Overlay POI 49 3D Calibration Status 91 ul Volume 88 Installation Angle Setup 92 Aj Phone Book 82 84 Service Info Screen 92 tf Dial Favorite 1 to Dial Favorite 5 82 84 Hard Disk Info 92 fii Whole Route Overview 36 Defined Locations 58 Stock Info 70 Background Picture Setting 93 ig Set My Favorites 70 Demo Mode 95 W My Favorites 71 Modify Current Location 95 3 Traffic On Route 66 OO W Day Night Display 50 Wi Address Book Icon Display 4G Appendix gt Appendix Menu in the Audio Screen Rear SP 152 Audio Settings men
202. fo Hard disk space Fros Space Weed Space Back Registering the Home Location and Favorite Location You can register one home location and one favorite location You can change the regis tered information later You might find it useful to register your workplace or a relative s home as your favorite location 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Defined Locations 2 Touch Go to When registering your home location touch Home Set Home and Gao To _ Home Go 4a 3 Search for a location to register You can select a method of location search suoipuny UOI EHIAEN 104 SHhuljZas jesaUayH ay HulAjipo ee Search Se arch ee y ET Search a Wacerose Mcstination Bi eiephone Wiin Back History z Starch we p Starch gt For more details about Address Search refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28 gt For more details about Information on searching for locations to register refer to Chapter 6 O Ifyou select Map Search move the scroll cursor to the place you want to set and touch OK 4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you want to register and touch OK The location is registered and the Edit regis tered information screen appears gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Ad dress Book on page 60 5 Touch OK Completes the registration Changing the Background Pi
203. for mation on page 70 i My Favorites Displays information on your favorite browsa ble item for XM tuner gt For details refer to Displaying favorite brow sable Information on page 71 I9 Traffic On Route Displays a list of traffic information on the route gt For details refer to Confirming traffic infor mation on the map on page 66 A Traffic Events Displays a list of traffic events information gt For details refer to Checking all traffic infor mation on page 65 W Day Night Display Switches Day Night Display setting gt For details refer to Setting the Map Color Change between Day and Night on page 50 Hj Address Book Icon Display Switches Address Book Icon setting gt For details refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46 3 To finish the setting touch OK Chapter Modifying Map Configurations 05 Displaying POI on the Map Displays icons for the surrounding facilities POI on the map 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then touch Overlay POI 2 Touch Display to turn it On O If you do not want to display the POI icon on the map touch Display to turn it Off Even if Display is turned Off the POI selection setting is retained 3 Touch the category you want to dis play 4 Touch Select Detail Select All DeselectAll ar m Select Ootail Gb Public Sorvicd amp Facility Select All Selects all detailed categories t
204. freeway are announced However if you pass intersections turns and other guide points in rapid succession some may not be announced e tis possible that guidance may direct you off a freeway and then back on again xipusddy Appendix E Appendix e n some cases the route may require you to travel in the opposite direction to your current heading In such cases you are in structed to turn around so please turn around safely by following the actual traffic rules e n some cases guidance may direct you past your destination and then indicate a U turn to get back to it e n some cases a route may begin on the opposite side of a railway or river from your actual current location If this happens drive towards your destination for a while and try route calculation again e When there is a traffic congestion or clo sure ahead if driving through the traffic congestion or closure is better than taking the detour a detour route may not appear e There may be instances when the starting point and the destination point are not on the highlighted route e The number of traffic circle exits displayed on the screen may differ trom the actual number of roads Auto Reroute e Auto Reroute is used when you deviate more than 0 02 mile Approx 30 m from the route e The Auto Reroute function does not work in the following cases when your vehicle is not on a street when you are too close to your destina t
205. g the numerical commands 106 Operating the Radio FM 107 Selecting FM asthe source 107 Screen configuration 107 Touch panel key operation 107 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 108 Tuning in strong signals 108 Operating the Radio AM 108 Selecting AM asthe source 108 Screen configuration 108 Touch panel key operation 108 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 109 Tuning in strong signals 109 Using the AV Source Music Library Music Library Recording 110 Recording all tracksinaCD 111 Recording a CD manually 111 Recording only the first track of a CD 111 Stopping CD recording 111 Notes on CD recording 112 Music Library Play 112 Selecting LIBRARY as the source 112 Screen configuration 112 Touch panel key operation 113 Creating a playlist with a customized order 116 Editing a playlist or tracks 117 Assigning another candidate for title information 122 Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS Operating the XM Satellite Radio 123 Selecting XM as the source 123 Screen configuration 123 Touch panel key operation 124 Display the Radio ID 125 Selecting a channel from the XM channel list display 125 Using My Mix function 126 Using the direct traffic announcement function 127 Operating the SIRIUS Satellite Radio 127 Selecting SIRIUS as the source 128 Touch panel key operation 128 Selecting teams for Game Alet 129 Displaying ga
206. g the rear view camera image returns you to the pre vious screen O The adjustments of Brightness Contrast and Dimmer are stored separately when your vehicle s headlights are off daytime and when your vehicle s headlights are on nighttime These are switched automati cally depending on the vehicle s headlights are on or off O You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the source without a video and navigation map display O The setting contents can be memorized se parately for the following screen and the Video image AM FM M CD iPod AUX XM SIRIUS screen LIBRARY Music Library screen Built in DVD drive TV image AV INPUT and EXT 1 EXT 2 Rear view camera image Navigation map and menu screen The picture adjustment may not be avail able with some rear view cameras I Because of the LCD screen characteristics you may not be able to adjust the screen at low temperatures 2 Touch or to adjust the desired item Each time you touch or increases or de creases the level of the desired item 3 Touch ESC to return to the previous screen 154 En Switching the backlight on or off By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen you can turn off the screen display and the voice guidance Press and hold V button The backlight turns off and the screen turns off O Press V button once again to turn on the backlight and the screen is displayed Cust
207. gation menu and then touch Emergency Info 2 Touch gaa A list of telephone numbers appears onsc reen 3 Touch the phone number you want to dial The signal is transmitted to the selected phone number Emer Benny TOW Sor vite g Insurance Touching MEA terminates the call Touch Back to return to the previous screen Searching for car service in an emergency In an emergency you can search the Emer gency Info for Auto Services in the vicinity of your current position and set the current route A WARNING The Emergency Info screen is only intended to provide information to a driver that may be useful during an emergency situation and if they are in C14 En a safe location If not or in all major accidents call 911 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Emergency Info 2 Touch Locate Car Service Fortonal mbirat WM tu BER COC wer Policy number AAA BRE Coe W bon ne air Vou are currently al CA 110 WPASADENA F H Lal 344 54 4 Emergency TOW service pore 055 220 0082 For non iow emergence dial Nji PEE Locale Car Servico A list of auto services appears onscreen 3 Touch the Category of the auto service you want to use lao Autontio E Car Deser O The Auto Service categories that can be se lected in the Emergency Info are Automotive and Car Dealer 4 Touch the selection method Soort All oa Deseeet
208. ge is displayed Touch Jump to switch to that station and you can view to that game information If you touch Stay the channel does not switch O Alert may not be provided depending on the situation of the navigation system Displaying game information Game Info You can display the game information of a team that you have set an alert for and change to the broadcast channel O This function is unavailable if no team is se lected in the game alert function 1 Touch Game Info The game name and the broadcast channel are also displayed 2 Touch Next or Previous to view the game score information which is regis tered O The game score will be updated automati cally Touch Tune To to switch to the channel that broadcasts the displayed game T If you have not made any team selections Not Set is displayed When games involving your favorite teams are not currently playing No Game is dis played Using My Mix function My Mix function memorizes the song title and artist name of the song currently being re ceived When the track that matches the mem orized song title and artist name is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to you will be alerted and you can switch the station to listen to that song O Atrack itself is NOT downloaded ONLY the song title and the artist name are memor ized Chapter Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS 14
209. gs menu 2 Touch On to turn high pass filter on To turn high pass filter off touch Off 3 Touch lt or gt to select cut off fre quency Each time you touch lt or gt selects cut off fre quencies in the following order 50 80 125 Hz When Preout the subwoofer controller set ting in System Settings menu is Sub W HPF function is effective for front speakers only If you change the acoustic field after you set it once the high pass filter HPF setting turns Off Adjusting source levels Source Level Source level adjustment lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching between sources O Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level which remains unchanged 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad just 2 Touch Source Level in Audio Settings menu 146 En 3 Touch or to adjust the source vo lume 8 to 8 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased Sources are set to same source level adjust ment volume automatically e CD and ROM MP3 e XM and SIRIUS e EXT 1 and EXT 2 e AUX and AV INPUT Customizing the System Settings Items System Settings lets you perform system set up of different settings for navigation system How to view and operate the System Settings 1 Press AV button The Navigation screen changes to the Audio source screen of any sou
210. gt Touch VOICE icon to call that facility Only when the phone number is registered in the facility Displaying the map of POI Destination gt POI gt Display lt PO name gt Display the map of that facility s surroundings Search by telephone number Destination Telephone Number gt Say the telephone number you want to search Location Screen A If mul tiple facilities exist with the same phone number the facilities you intend may not be displayed Note You can say 10 digits telephone number only 911 and the number other than 10 digits is not available Chapter ED Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Search by entry on the address book Destination Address Book lt Registered location s pronunciation gt Location Screen A Destination Go To lt Registered location s pronunciation gt f the route already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation If there is no route the system starts the route calculation Destination Waypoint lt Registered location s pronunciation gt Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation Making phone call to entry on the address book Destination Call lt Registered location s pronunciation gt f the registered location has telephone number data touch VOICE icon to call the registered location Displaying the map of the entry on the address book Destination Display lt Registered
211. h Search The group selection screen appears 2 Touch Genres Genre playlist appears 3 Touch the genre Genre playlist you want to play back a ted a DI soundsvicioncoul gt i Grivel T FI NEER TIME 03 13 T 0 Rock Pop PO search Mit 5 2 Hip Hons Rap EERS kri miil 4 03 Others El s ra Pata Merny _ AV Sothings LH The first track in the selected playlist is played back Asesqi DISNIAI a21N0S AY 24 Buis p Chapter ED Using the AV Source Music Library Creating a playlist with a customized order You can register your favorite tracks as a play list and play them back in desired order My Favorites group has two types of play lists 1035 _ E S 01 eound vsion soul a i Griveil T PIONEER TIME 03 32 PE MyM 8 0D My Favorite es LS My Favorite MTS Ld My Favorite 3 in m DE My Favorite AV Tolling fl My Mix playlist You can register the track being played in one action My Favorite 1 4 playlist You can register tracks from the detailed screen information Registering a track to My Mix playlist in one action You can register the track being played to the favorite playlist called My Mix Touch and hold Memo while playing back the track you want to register The track being played is registered in My Mix playlist Register tracks one by one
212. hat are in cluded in that category E g all categories of restaurants including Japanese and fast food Deselect All Deselects the selected category 5 Touch the desired detailed category O You can select up to 100 items from the de tailed category a Public Service a Fanii P re Folica Station i i Government Office MS Post Offier i Couri House i Convention Center d ES sty canter Categories that are already set will have a red check mark 6 Touch OK Returns previous screen 7 To finish the selection touch OK gt For details refer to Vewing the information of a specified location on page 44 Viewing the Map Color Legend You can browse the type of the roads and areas displayed on the map 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then touch Map Legend 2 Touch the type which you want to see Coty Map Areas Mhan Artis Mity Map Lines Mak and Boundaries laviaation Lines 3 Touch or 4 to switch to the next page or previous page n en ED sion hotsilal and other sites pi Fo rire 78 COET On this screen you can operate the following items Day You can check the color of the Day screen Night You can check the color of the Night screen 1 To return the previous screen touch Back Changing the View Mode for the Navigation Map You can change the map display mode O You cannot perform this operation in Scroll mode
213. he 0 05 mile 50 m map scale or lower The screen changes automatically when you enter certain metropolitan city area O The detailed city map may not appear for the following reasons The data for that city area is not con tained in the hard disk drive When you are driving on a freeway Display items O Information with the mark appears only when the route is set O Depending on the conditions and settings some items may not be displayed A Current location The current location of your vehicle The tip of the triangular mark indicates your heading and the display moves automatically as you drive O The head of the triangular mark is the cur rent vehicle position H Destination The checkered flag indicates your destination Guidance point The next guidance point next turning point etc is shown by a yellow flag Up to the next three guidance points are dis played al Waypoint The checkered flag and number 1 to 5 indi cates your waypoint M Name of the street to be used or next gui dance point 2 Distance to the guidance point Touching AEEA allows you to hear the infor mation again 3 Distance to the destination or distance to waypoint The distance on this button shows the dis tance to the destination or to each waypoint If waypoints are set the distance to the destina tion and the next waypoint change with each touch O When the vehicle position is on the r
214. he system starts the route calculation 162 En Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 18 Set the map location as your waypoint Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen gt Basic Operation Set As Way point Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation Registering the map location to the address book Basic Operation Registration gt The system register that point and Information edit screen appears Operating the navigation map scale Map Operation Change Scale XXXX kilometer s Scale lt 25 meters Scale 50 meters Scale 100 meters Scale 200 meters Scale 500 meters Scale 1 kilometer Scale 2 kilometers Scale 5 kilometers Scale 10 kilometers Scale 20 kilo meters Scale 50 kilometers Scale 100 kilometers Scale 200 kilometers Scale 500 kilometers Scale 1000 kilometers Scale 2000 kilometers Scale gt Map screen will be changed to selected scale Notes e These commands are available only when km mile setting is km e This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode Map Operation Change Scale XXXX mile s Scale lt 0 02 miles Scale 0 05 miles Scale 0 1 miles Scale 0 25 miles Scale 0 5 miles Scale 0 75 miles Scale 1 mile Scale 2 5 miles Scale 5 miles Scale 10 miles Scale 25 miles Scale 50 miles Scale 100 miles Scale 250 miles Scale 500 miles Scale 1000 miles Scale gt Map screen will be cha
215. he view mode There are six types of map display and two ad ditional view modes e Map Mode e Guide Mode during route guidance only e Route View during route guidance only e Driver s View e 2D Twin Map View e 3D Twin Map View e Vehicle Dynamics e Rear View Only possible when Camera Input is set to On 1 Press MAP button to display a map of the area around your current position 2 Press MAP button again 3 Touch the mode name to select the mode you want to display Driver s Vigw Lj y Pris ne Mode W sine Mode Boule View Ek g Fp Twin Map Eh Twi in Map E Vehicle _ Vow ki View tim Rear View H d Back O You can display the view mode screen by touching Map in the navigation menu and touching View Mode How to view the map of the current location O This example shows a case where Second Maneuver Arrow is set to View 38 En Map Mode Displays the standard map 2 ima gem qmr i Fa 8 Guide Mode Overlays two arrows onto the standard map Map Mode jam _ 8 Route View Displays the name of the street you will travel along next and an arrow indicating the direc tion of travel Chapter How to Read the Map Display 04 Driver s View 3D Twin Map View Shows a map from the driver s viewpoint You can split the screen in half The right screen and the left screen can display a map in different scales The 3D map appears on
216. hen the positioning by GPS is not available such as when your vehi cle enters a long tunnel the discrepancy be tween your actual and calculated position may become bigger O The speed pulse data comes from the speed sensing circuit The location of this speed sensing circuit depends on your ve hicle model In some cases it is impossible to make a connection to It and in sucha case we recommend that ND PG1 speed pulse generator Sold separately be used How do GPS and dead reckoning work together For maximum accuracy your navigation sys tem continually compares GPS data with your estimated position as calculated from the data of 3D Hybrid Sensor However if only the data from the 3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a long period positioning errors are gradually compounded until the estimated position be comes unreliable For this reason whenever GPS signals are available they are matched with the data of the 3D Hybrid Sensor and used to correct it for improved accuracy To ensure maximum accuracy the dead reck oning system learns with experience By com paring the position it estimates with your actual position as obtained using GPS it can correct for various types of error Such as tire wear and the rolling motion of your vehicle As you drive the dead reckoning system gradu ally gathers more data learns more and the accuracy of its estimates gradually increases So after you have driven some distance you
217. int distance in a straight line from the current location as waypoint 1 and sort the other points including your destination in order of distance from the waypoint 1 Manual You can manually sort destination and way points Touch the destination and waypoints on the left side of the screen in the order you want to visit The touched destination and way points are displayed on the right side of the screen Touch OK to complete the sorting and the previous screen appears Sort Waypeinis ME MOUNTAIN ST ME WOSKINGTON BLYD WWILSON AVE FAW WOODBURY RD E WASHINGTON BLY F W WOODBURY RD Hs 4 Touch OK The route is calculated again and Route con firmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 Skipping a waypoint If points are set the next waypoint along the route can be skipped 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Cancel Route 2 Touch Skip A new route to your destination through all re maining waypoints except for the skipped waypoint is calculated Route confirmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 uo e130d0C Jiseg Chapter zy How to Read the Map Display How to Use the Map Most of the information provided by your navi gation system can be seen on the map You need to get to know how the information ap pears on the map Switching t
218. ints gt For details refer to Editing Waypoints on page 36 When the route guidance starts Touching OK in Route confirmation screen starts the route guidance on the displayed route Your navigation system gives you the fol lowing information with the timing adjusted to the speed of your vehicle Distance to the next turning point Direction of travel Road number of the freeway Arrival of waypoint If waypoints are set Arrival of your destination O Touching Ei or gl allows you to turn the voice guidance on or off O Touching allows you to hear the in formation again O If you stop at a gas station or a restaurant during the route guidance your navigation system remembers your destination and route information When you start the en gine and get back on the road the route guidance resumes O If you deviate from the route with guidance set to Route View or Guide Mode and enter a street not recorded on the hard disk drive the screen changes to Map Mode When you return to the route the screen re turns to the original view and resumes route guidance Basic items on the screen This section describes only the basic items that are displayed on the Map Mode screen gt For more details about Details of the map screen refer to How to Use the Map on page 38 E Er BE W WOODBURY RI al ge 3 at FAR OAKS AVE Ph Current location 2 Distance to the desti
219. ion when your vehicle is on a ferry when driving on a road inside a facility when driving on a traffic circle when driving on the routes are de scribed in Route highlighting e The system assumes the driver deviated either intentionally or inadvertently from the route and searches for another route intelligent rerouting Depending on the si tuation the system may search a new route that does not return to the original one 198 En Route highlighting e Once set the route is highlighted in bright green or light blue on the map e The immediate vicinity of your starting point and destination may not be high lighted and neither will areas with particu larly complex road layouts Consequently the route may appear to be cut off on the display but voice guidance will continue Roads not used in calculations Even though displayed on screen the follow ing roads are not included in route calcula tions e Walkways e Public vehicle only e Non access road gt For details refer to Viewing the Map Color Le gend on page 49 Tracking e Your navigation system marks your course on the map in certain increments This is called tracking It is handy when you want to check a route traveled without guidance or if returning along a complex route e Amaximum of about 155 miles 250 km is marked and as you travel beyond this limit tracking marks are erased in order from the most distant Tracking d
220. is invalid Even if you change this setting there is no output unless you turn Non Fading or Sub Woofer in Audio Settings menu On gt For details refer to Using non fading output on page 145 gt For details refer to Using subwoofer output on page 145 Switching the 5 1ch setting When the navigation system is combined with the multi channel processor system Sold se parately you can use the multi channel sound Enter the following setting when combining the multi channel processor system A CAUTION DO NOT enter this setting before you connect the multi channel processor system If this setting is entered the RCA SUBWOOFER OUTPUT or NON FADING OUTPUT will output maximum vo lume for the multi channel processor system Pioneer is not responsible for any damage to the speaker equipment caused by ignoring this warn ing O This setting is possible only when the opti cal cable connection box supplied with the Multi channel processor is connected to the navigation system 1 Touch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn source off When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual 2 Touch 5 1Ch Setup in the System Set tings menu If you touch 5 1Ch Setup it will be turned On If you touch 5 1Ch Setup again to turn Off the setting 5 1Ch Setup will disappear If you want to tu
221. isplay shows about 100 miles 160 km tracking of your vehicle with white dots gt For details refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46 Displaying POI Points of Interest POI that can be displayed on the enlarged map of the intersection or Driver s View left screen are only the spe cial Points of Interest POI that contain the position information Not all of Points of Inter ests POI are displayed Appendix Appendix c Detail Information for Playable Media DVD discs and other DVD media types It may not be possible to use certain func tions with some DVD Video discs It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs When DVD R DVD RW discs are used playback is possible only for discs that have been finalized When DVD R DVD RW discs are used playback is possible only for discs that have been recorded in Video format video mode It is not possible to play back DVD R RW discs which have been recorded in Video Recording format VR mode It may not be possible to play back DVD R DVD RW discs that have been recorded in Video format video mode because of disc characteristics scratches or dirt on the disc or dirt scratches or condensation on the lens of this product Itis not possible to play back general DVD ROM discs or DVD RAM discs Only DVD ROM discs authorized by Pioneer can be read Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depe
222. ites 3 Touch git O To return to the previous screen touch The system enters the track edit mode Back m E Operating the playlist edit mode Drive it Album playlist Artist d PIDMEER TINE herring Rock Pop E etete er T This Track Tio Wy Fami Chapter ED Using the AV Source Music Library All editing operations are possible The edited contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard disk drive My Mix playlist My Favorite playlist Only and can be performed Enter a desired playlist title gt For details refer to Changing the title of the playlist or track on the next page 2 Edit the pronunciation that is used asa voice command for voice recognition gt For details refer to Changing the pronuncia tion of a playlist name or track name on the next page 3 Enter a desired artist name gt For details refer to Renaming an artist name in the playlist or track on page 120 4 Sort playback order of the playlists gt For details refer to Sorting the playlists on page 120 5 Delete the playlist gt For details refer to De eting a playlist on page 121 6 Delete the selected tracks from that play list gt For details refer to De eting a track from the playlist on page 121 D Update title information gt For details refer to Assigning another candi date for title information on page 122 118 En Add the selected tracks to My F
223. itle language etc After touching W once start playback once more Select the appropriate setting for that image Page 149 Page 148 Turn parental lock off or change the level Page 148 Input the correct code number Page 148 Switching to a selected language is not possi ble if the language selected in DVD V Setup is not recorded on the disc Retry after entering within range for service Perform the connection process To use the cellular phone featuring the Blue tooth wireless technology with this navigation system the registration process is necessary Appendix Appendix c Messages and How to React to Them The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system O There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here In such a case follow the instructions given on the display Messages for navigation functions Message When What to do See Irregular speed pulse signal If the Navigation system does not re Consult your Pioneer dealer detected Please power off ceive the vehicle speed pulse the system and check the in stallation Then please re boot the system and press OK 3 Speed pulse not connected The speed signal input pink lead To operate with 3D hybrid mode connect the Calibration will start without wire of the power cable is not con speed signal input pink lead wire of the 2 speed pulse Accuracy isnot nected power
224. itted to the external unit T Some functions may not be used until you touch and hold the key To return to the previous screen touch Back Switching the automatic and manual function You can turn automatic and manual function on or oft You can switch between Auto and Manual functions of the external unit connected Initially this function is set to Auto O Operating commands set for Auto and Manual operations vary depending on the external unit connected 1 Touch Function 2 Touch Auto Manual Touching Auto Manual switches between Auto and Manual O Operation varies depending on the external unit connected In some cases the exter nal unit may not respond CM To return to the previous screen touch Back Chapter Using the AV Source AV EXT AUX CH Operating the AUX input source AUX An IP BUS RCA Interconnector such as CD RB20 CD RB10 sold separately lets you con nect your navigation system to auxiliary equip ment featuring RCA output For more details refer to the IP BUS RCA Interconnector own er s manual Selecting AUX as the source 1 AUX Input is set to On gt For details refer to Switching the auxiliary setting on page 150 2 Touch the source icon and touch AUX gt For details refer to Se ecting a source on page 97 XNV LX AV 824no0s AV y Buisp Chapter Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual V
225. ituations press to start the voice op eration VR CANCEL ON HOOK button Press to reject a call when there is an incom ing call Press to hang up the phone during talking on the phone In voice operation return to the previous screen A Y button Same function as PLIST A V button lt gt button Same function as TRK lt gt button button Same function as VOL W A button BAND button Same function as Band touch panel key SOURCE button Same function as AV button Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio Viewing the audio operation screen and displaying the Audio Settings menu Normal screen e g CD in Mation T 01 Set Motion E Broce Hems 00 08 07 Sat Motion Pr 02 Fighting Brothers ree Les Mth fet alld The 22h Waltz re 05 Arsonists Information plate Displays the information e g track title about the source being played 2 Touch panel keys Touch to operate the source being played 3 Detailed information Displays the detailed information about the source being played 4 AV Settings key Displays the AV Settings menu Hide key Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys and detailed information If you touch the screen they are displayed again Audio Settings tab Switches the setting items to those for Audio Settings T System Settings tab Switches the setting items to those for System Settings Setting Items
226. ive Difference in distance and travel time be tween the existing route and new route Distance from the current position of your ve hicle to the point of entry into the new route En UOIFEULIOJU DIZJeAL Busy KD Using Traffic Information On this screen you can select the following items New The recommended route is displayed on the screen Current The current route is displayed on the screen OK The displayed route is set O When no selection is made the screen re turns to previous screen Checking traffic information manually Touching notification icon on the map screen allows you to check traffic information on your route while icon is displayed Only if there is any traffic information on your route notifica tion icon is displayed on the navigation map screen O The notification icon will not be available when your vehicle deviate from the route O Traffic flow information is taken into ac count only when Traffic Flow in Traffic Settings is checked 1 Set Show Traffic Incident to View gt For details refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46 2 Press MAP button to display the current location The icon appears when the system acquires traffic information on the current route 3 Touch the icon while the icon is dis played Notification icon A f renee ae The displayed icon indicates the type of the traffic information 68 En 4 Tou
227. ix Appendix c If you try to record anew CD but the Delete some playlists and retry Exceeded playlist maximum maximum number of playlists are No more playlists can be re already recorded The album play corded list can be stores up to 400 Playback error Music Library The music library component is ab Consult your dealer cannot be played normal This playlist cannot store If you try to add tracks but My Mix Delete some tracks and retry more than 99 tracks or My Favorite playlists are maxi mum number My Mix and My Fa vorite playlists can store the tracks up to 99 This track cannot be added to The music library component is ab Consult your dealer MyMix normal Name cannot be used for Some invalid characters have been Enter different characters so that the system voice recognition Try again entered and the system cannot con can pronounce it vert it to the appropriate pronuncia 5 tion Single recording mode will Recording tracks other than the first When you set Single in REC Mode the Q only record the first trackof track of CD when the recording system only can record the first track of CD CD mode is Single Set Auto or Manual in REC Mode and retry Page 152 HDD is full This CD cannot be There is no free space for recording Delete some tracks or playlists and try again recorded in the hard disk drive if you want to record that CD Unable to select appropriate Some corre
228. ized After that the navigation system re starts 7 Press MENU button and then touch Settings The setting menu appears 8 Touch Hardware and then touch 3D Calibration Status 9 Touch Learning Status and then touch Reset All Preset All oon Distance Study 1 F eo j t Adjusting the Response Positions of the Touch Panels Touch Panel Calibration If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch adjust the response po sitions of the touch panel There are two ad justment methods 4 point adjustment in which you touch four corners of the screen and 16 point adjustment in which you make fine adjustments on the entire screen Appendix Appendix c O Make sure to use the supplied stylus for ad justment and gently touch the screen If you press the touch panel forcefully the touch panel may be damaged Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen Otherwise the screen is damaged Stylus supplied with navigation system 1 Press V button The Picture Adjust screen appears 2 Press and hold V button for two sec onds or more The 4 point touch panel adjustment screen ap pears 3 Touch and hold each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen Hold the pen on the arrow until each one of the four arrows turns red 1 ingeate each
229. k multi session compatible recorded discs MP3 files are not compatible with packet write data transfer The maximum number of characters for the file and folder name is 32 characters including extension mp3 However the navigation system uses proportional font Therefore the number of the characters that you can display varies according to the width of each character When playing discs with both MP3 files and audio data CD DA such as CD EXTRA and MIXED MODE CDs both types can be played only by switching the mode between MP3 and CD DA The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations is the writing se quence used by the writing software For this reason the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence However there En also are some writing software that permit the setting of the playback order e Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause When these discs are converted to MP3 files and burned to a CD R CD RW CD ROM the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each one regard less of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD e Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver 1 0 and Ver 1 1 formats for displaying album disc title track track title and ar tist track artist e The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 files of 32 kHz 44 1 kHz and 48 kHz fre quen
230. lable The screen cannot be displayed with If the sensor learning status reaches the Sen now Vehicle Dynamics Display The sen sor Initializing the system is ready to be sor has not been taught so the sen used sor information cannot be acquired The vertical installation angle f the mounting angle of the naviga The system initializes the sensor in order to is changed Gyro Sensor cali tion unit has been changed operate it with the maximum performance bration is re initialized and automatically starts re learning en 179 Appendix E Appendix Excess vertical installation angle detected Please install the navigation unit correctly No data available at this time UPDATING Updating Route calculation was not possible Route calculation not possible because destination is too far Route calculation not possible because destination is too close Route calculation not possible due to traffic regulations Route calculation not possible because navigation cannot be provided around destination or starting point Route to destination cannot be calculated e Ferry could not be avoided e Toll roads could not be avoided e Freeway could not be avoided e Ferry toll roads and free ways could not be avoided e Ferry and toll roads could not be avoided e Toll roads and freeways could not be avoided e Ferry and freeways could not be avoided 180 En The navigation system is installed with
231. language is recorded on the DVD subtitles audio and menu are displayed in that language 1 Switch the audio source to DVD 2 Touch DVD V Setup in System Settings menu 3 Touch Subtitle Language Audio Language or Menu Language Each language menu is displayed and the cur rently set language is selected 4 Touch the desired language When you select Others a language code input display is shown Input the four digit code of the desired language then touch Enter gt For details refer to Language Code Chart for DVD on page 155 O If the selected language is not recorded on the disc the default language specified on the disc is output and displayed O You can also switch the subtitle and audio language by touching Subtitle or Audio during playback gt For more details about Changing the subti tle language during playback Multi subtitle refer to Jouch panel key operation on page 105 gt For more details about Changing audio language during playback Multi audio refer to ouch panel key operation on page 105 Setting assist subtitles on or off Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au rally impaired However they are only dis played if they are recorded on the DVD You can turn assist subtitles on or off as de sired 1 Touch DVD V Setup in System Settings menu 2 Touch Assist Subtitle Touching Assist Subtitle switches between On and Off Setting angle icon
232. laylist they are only de leted from the playlist and not from the hard disk drive 1 Enter the playlist edit mode gt For details refer to Switching to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch Delete Tracks 3 Touch the tracks you want to delete When you touch a track a check mark ap pears Indicating that it is selected To deselect it touch the track again ie a edd Delete Tracks Bor privet i Loa E T 02 Eye to eye Muir integration Me 0a PREMER mis Ta MELOS Britianca Touch gt to proceed to the next operation Select All Selects all tracks in the playlist All Off Cancels the selection of all tracks in the play list 4 Touch Back 5 Touch Yes Deleting the current track O If you delete the track the track is deleted from the hard disk drive It is deleted from My Favorites group at the same time O If you delete the track the system does not delete the edited title information Aseiqr DIsniAl 84no0s AY y Buisn en 121 Chapter ED Using the AV Source Music Library O Ifyou delete the tracks in My Mix playlist or My Favorite playlist they are only de leted from the playlist and not from the hard disk drive 1 Enter the track edit mode gt For details refer to Switching to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch Delete This Track 3 Touch Yes Changing the genre of a track 1 Enter the track edit mode gt
233. lder and track list Shows contents of the folder currently playing or temporarily displayed Bit rate Shows the bit rate of the file currently playing Touch panel key operation Touch panel keys E od Evan gt 0d Light yf Harth Select tracks from the list or viewing con tents of the folders The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder names on a disc If you touch a folder on the list you can view its contents If you touch a track on the list you can play the se lected track O Touching H or M switches to the next or previous page in the list C1 If the selected folder does not contain any track that can be played the track list is not displayed 2 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause 3 Touch Skip forward or backward Touching gt skips to the start of the next track Touching ka once skips to the start of the current track Touching again will skip to the previous track Touch and hold Fast rewind or forward Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio Keep touching ka or gt gt I to perform fast re wind or forward O You can also perform these operations by using TRK lt gt button O Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the beginning of the first track on the disc O In the case of MP3 there is no sound on fast rewind or forward 4 Stop playback When you stop playback by touching W that track number
234. m pacted by such factors as GPS signal detec tion speed pulse wire connectivity and driving habits or conditions of the place where the vehicle is parked e Itis strongly suggested that the speed pulse wire be connected for accuracy of navigation and better performance of interlock e f the speed pulse wire is unavailable for some reason it is recommended that the pulse gen erator ND PG1 sold separately be used When you attempt to watch Video image while driving the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited will appear on the screen To watch Video image on this display stop the vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake Rear view camera and Rear View mode With an optional rear view camera you are able to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an eye on trailers or to back into a tight parking spot A warning SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED e USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE Features Characteristics of this software Touch panel key operation It is possible to operate the navigation func tions and the Audio functions by using touch panel keys Chapter Before Using the System 02 Variety of view modes Various types of screen display can be se lected for navigation guidance
235. make even when the vehicle lights are play sure Automatic is selected Page 50 n The orange white lead is not con Check the connection nected The display is very dim The vehicle s light is turned ON and Read about Day Night Display setting and Automatic is selected on Day if desired select Day Page 50 Night Display The vehicle cabin temperature is ex A Liquid Crystal Display LCD is used and tremely low such displays tend to darken when cold Wait for the vehicle to warm up Picture quality adjustment of the Adjust the picture quality Page 153 display is not correct Display tilt is not at the proper set Press and hold EJECT button to adjust the tilt ting en 175 Appendix 73 Appendix No sounds are heard The volume level will not rise The volume of beeps and naviga tion guidance cannot be ad justed Adjusting the volume of naviga tion guidance and beeps is not possible A strange sound is heard when the vehicle comes close to a cer tain place e g Dog barking An alarm sounds when you ap proach the registered location and the set image pops up re gardless of whether Address Book Icon is set to Off Slope is not displayed on Vehi The volume level is low The attenuator or mute is on The speaker lead is disconnected You cannot adjust these parameters with VOL A F button You cannot adjust them with VOL A F button The sound fo
236. mation related to that place can be edited gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Address Book on this page zea Sorts the items in the list alphabetically This is the default sorting order O Active if there are items in the list and current sort is not alphabetically lt Sorts the items in the list in order of the dis tance trom the vehicle position O Active if there are items in the list and current sort is not by distance form cur rent position EZE En 9 Add The screen for selecting the method for re gistering the location in Address Book ap pears gt For details refer to Registering a Location into Address Book on the previous page Delete Deletes the registered locations gt For details refer to Deleting the entry in Address Book on page 63 a Back Returns previous screen Editing the entry in Address Book In the Address Book menu touching EZE on the right hand side of the location displays the Edit registered information screen 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Address Book 2 Touch g2 on the right hand side of the location that you want to edit the informa tion for Hame LEMP AWE Promuncahon Phone leon Fichero Sound P Modify Location ar M Name You can enter the desired name 2 Pronunciation You can enter the desired pronunciation in dependently from the name The registered pronunciation is
237. me information Game Info 130 Using My Mix function 130 Using the Traffic amp Weather preset function 132 B Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV Operating the Multi CD Player 133 Selecting M CD as the source 133 Screen configuration 133 Touch panel key operation 133 Operating the iPod 134 Selecting iPod as the source 134 Screen configuration 135 Touch panel key operation 135 Browsing forasong 136 Operating the TV tuner 136 Selecting TV asthe source 136 Screen configuration 137 Touch panel key operation 137 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 137 Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 138 Using the AV Source AV EXT AUX Operating the AV Input source 139 en 5 ED Contents Selecting AV INPUT as the source 139 Operating the External Unit 139 Selecting EXT 1 or EXT 2 as the source 139 Screen configuration 139 Touch panel key operation 139 Operate the external unit by using 1 key 6key 140 Operate the external unit by using Function 1 Function4 140 Switching the automatic and manual function 140 Operating the AUX input source AUX 141 Selecting AUX asthe source 141 D Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual AV Setting Overview 142 How to Operate the Audio Settings screen 142 Customizing the Audio Settings Items 142 Using the equalizer 142 Setting the simulated sound stage 144
238. mple you want to search for a play list and play that playlist 1 Touch VOICE icon when the audio source is LIBRARY 2 Say Music Search 3 Say the desired group Albur Artigt Genre by Favorites 1 If the desired group is already selected you can skip this step 4 Say the name of the playlist you want to play The worlds dirsi Sound sion EmA Comming gener alion Act as guide O If there are multiple pages voice help menu can be switched by using BE or EE on the screen You can also switch the page by saying Next page or Previous page O You can also search the track in the current playlist by saying Track Search m Available Voice Commands This section describes the flow and available commands of each voice operation O When Language in Regional Settings is changed to another language the com mands that you registered can be used only if the language for voice operation is the same Oo Oo Oo For lt City Name gt lt Street Name gt lt House number gt shown on the following chart say the real name or number which you want to search for For example if the real city name is Long Beach and you want to operate Search by address say Long Beach instead of lt City Name gt For lt POI Name gt shown on the following chart say the real POI name that you want to search for For example if the real POI name is San Francisco I
239. my tines 4 aml i i items to be displayed during the navigation Traic Trate Traffic Traffic Phame Meta function Roule Events iw Settings View Mode can be selected only when Stock inion Set aaa Enemy MM Status the vehicle position is at the current posi E es Fay a i tion If you want to select View Mode while scrolling the map press MAP button Use this menu to check traffic information to center the current position back on the using the GEX P10XMT t vehicle position If you are using a cellular phone featuring Settings menu Bluetooth technology by connecting the Blue tooth unit ND BT1 2 sold separately to the ie ee tae navigation system you can configure Blue F o Ged gece tooth settings or check the outgoing incoming onus ben call history You can also register information for emergencies Mote cara i O Traffic On Route Traffic Events Traf 1 fic Flow Stock Info Set My Favorites and My Favorites can be active only Customize the navigation functions so they when the GEX P10XMT 1 is connected to can be used easily the navigation system gt For details refer to Chapter 11 O Phone Menu is active only when the Bluetooth unit ND BT1 2 is connected to the navigation system GEX P10XMT 1 XM Digital Satellite Data amp Audio Receiver sold separately Traffic information only avail Buttons you can use KD Basic Operation The availability of a specifi
240. n timing on page 150 While your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is connected Ef is dis played on the map En Buluoud 32 1j spueH Buisn ED Using Hands free Phoning O If you operate using CD SR1 Steering Re mote Control sold separately the follow ing buttons can be used for operation VR ACTIVATION OFF HOOK button Same function as on the screen Except for Received Calls and Emergency Info VR CANCEL ON HOOK button Same function as or ga on the screen PHONE MENU button Open Phone Menu directly Setting up for hands free phoning Before you can use the hands free phoning function you will need to set up the navigation system for using that function This entails re gistering your cellular phone with the naviga tion system and establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between the navigation system and your cellular phone Registering your cellular phone You need to register your cellular phone featur ing Bluetooth wireless technology when you connect it for the first time A total of five phones can be registered Iwo registration methods are available e Registration from the navigation system e Registration from the cellular phone O Once you have registered a phone you can select that cellular phone from the list to connect it without registration O If you try to register more than five cellular phones the system will ask you to select one
241. n describes various ways to the relevant section of this chapter 3 search for a destination edit the current SA O route conditions and operate the route dur 2 Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive 2 ing route guidance and Radio A This section describes how to use DVD VI o 7 Registering and Editing Locations deos CDs MP3 discs and the radio You can register and edit the points on the map This chapter describes how to register a home location favorite location or other location and how to edit the entry in Ad dress Book 3 Using the AV Source Music Library You can record a music CD to the hard disk drive in the navigation system This chapter describes recording music and playing back the recorded music Using Traffic Information When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner GEX Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS This chapter describes the audio source op erations that can be used when an XM satel lite radio tuner or SiriusConnect universal tuner is connected P10XMT is connected to the navigation sys tem the system can acquire traffic informa tion and perform navigation using the traffic information This chapter describes ways of viewing traffic icons that are displayed on Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV the map and operation related traffic infor This chapter describes the sais eres op MALON erations that can be used when Pioneer Using XM Tuner and Other Information audio equipment feat
242. n the igni lar temperature Please re drive exceeds the operating limits tion switch off and wait until the built in DVD move the disc drive s temperature returns to within normal operating limits ATTENTION Viewing of front Parking brake interlock is activated Park your vehicle in the safe place and apply seat video source while driv the parking brake Page 22 ing is strictly prohibited Search error The title number chapter number Enter the available numbers or 10 key com time or 10 key command that you mand or use another search method enter in 10Key Search do not exist This message will appear when the DVD drive cannot accept that command Hard disk drive Music Library Message When What to do See This CD cannot be recorded If you insert a CD which prohibits Use another CD and retry second generation copies or dupli cate e Recording error Switching If recording can not be carried out Clean the disc and retry to CD playback mode due to continuous skipping on cer Clean the pick up lens with a commercially e Recording error Recording tain part of the disc because the available cleaning kit for DVD then retry is stopped disc is dirty scratched or otherwise Retry in vibration free condition e The recording was unstable damaged the pick up lens of the Restart the recording from DVD drive is dirty or extreme vibra the beginning of the track tion occurs continuously 184 En Append
243. nation 3 Estimated time of arrival default ON OFF key for voice guidance Canceling the Route Guidance If you no longer need to travel to your destina tion or if you want to change your destination follow the steps below to cancel the route gui dance 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Cancel Route A message confirming whether to cancel the Current route appears 2 Touch Yes al eT gy Sethe Are you sure you want to cancel the route al at ale The current route is deleted and a map of your Surroundings reappears On this screen you can also select the follow ing items Skip Skip the route to the selected waypoint and re calculate the route The skipped waypoint will not be deleted No Returns to the previous display without delet ing the route en 33 uo e130d0C Jiseg KD Basic Operation Modifying the Route Calculation Conditions You can modify the conditions for route calcu lation and recalculate the current route 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview 11 Route Overview is displayed only when the route is set 2 Touch Options NUT A Of i F gt ri I Options Profile MGENI Waypoints E Oh3im H0 am a De 3 Touch the desired items to change the route calculation conditions and then touch OK Avoid Tell Road Aven Farry Avon Freoway Time restric tices
244. ndicated by the scroll cursor to the Address Book gt For details refer to Registering a Location into Address Book on page 59 i Vicinity Search Find POls Points Of Interest in the vicinity of the scroll cursor gt For details refer to Finding a PO in the Vici nity on page 53 ig Overlay POI Displays icons for surrounding facilities POI on the map gt For details refer to Displaying POI on the Map on page 49 EH Volume Displays Volume gt For more details about Volume refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 88 H Phone Book Displays Phone Book gt For details refer to Calling a number in the phone book on page 82 gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Phone Book on page 84 i Menu Close Hides the Shortcut menu m Ae dsig dew au pe dy 0 MoH Chapter KD Modifying Map Configurations A CAUTION For safety reasons you cannot use some of these navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo tion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22 Entering the Map Menu 1 Press MENU button to display the navi gation menu 2 Touch Map to display the Map menu 3 Change the setting gt For more details about Adjusting each item refer to Chapter 5 C1 This section describes the details of the set ting for each item Settings marke
245. nding on the environment and the application set tings Please record with the correct for mat For details contact the manufacturer of the application About playing DualDisc DualDiscs are two sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit However since the CD side of DualDiscs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard it may not be pos sible to play the CD side with this naviga tion system Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc Serious scratches can lead to playback pro blems on this navigation system In some cases a DualDisc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject To prevent this we recommend you refrain from using DualDisc with this navigation system Please refer to the manufacturer for more detailed information about DualDiscs About AVCHD recorded discs This unit is not compatible with discs re corded in AVCHD Advanced Video Codec High Definition format Do not insert AVCHD discs If inserted the disc may not be ejected CD R CD RW discs When CD R CD RW discs are used play back is possible only for discs that have been finalized It may not be possible to play back CD R CD RW discs recorded on a music CD re corder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics scratches or dirt on the dis
246. ne should be fixed at a Suitable distance directly in front of the driver Pause before giving a command Speaking too soon may cause the recognition to fail Pronounce your commands carefully Speak slowly deliberately and clearly O If the registered voice command and the default voice command is the same the re gistered voice command e g the pronun ciation for the entry in Address Book and the playlist in Music library will take prior ity In this case the default voice command will not function To use the default voice command change or delete the registered voice command that is identical to the de fault voice command m SdIOA YUM Wia SAsg UO I eHIAeN ANOA KHulzesado Chapter KD Operating Your Navigation System with Voice An Example of Voice Operation Search for POI in vicinity In this example you want to search for the nearest gas station and set it as your destina tion O Give the following verbal commands after switching to the navigation screen gt For details refer to Voice commands related to navigation on page 161 1 Press MAP button to display the navi gation map screen 2 Touch VOICE icon A list of commands for voice operation ap pears After the message the beep indicates that the system is ready to accept your voice command Say a command after this beep 3 Say Destination Pasic Operation Destination Map Operation Route Gotons Traffic Information
247. nfirmation screen appears Proceed to Step 9 8 Touch the city or area where your desti nation is located Street COUNTY H A AtA CHILCOOT TovaLTow PORTOLA VINTON When a route is not set route calculation starts immediately gt For details refer to Checking and modifying the route on page 32 When a route is already set Location confir mation screen is shown gt For details reter to Checking the location on the map on the next page Chapter Basic Operation CH Touching Hor M on the scroll bar scrolls O If there is no matching location the naviga tion system displays The address does not exist Do you want to continue When you touch Yes a place near the spe cified location appears In this case pay at tention to the displayed location may not be suitable for your intention If you want to try again touch No to return to the previous screen If you did not input the house number in Step 5 the house number input screen ap pear after this step You should input the house number now perform Step 5 through the list and allows you to view the remaining items amp If all of characters cannot be displayed with in the displayed area touching 3g to the right of the item allows you to see remain ing characters eB Touching amp displays a map of the place you have selected Possibilities for place names may appear with the list screen Yo
248. ng BESE O During a call the E is displayed at the right hand side of the screen Chapter Using Hands free Phoning dH 2 To end the call touch gg at the top right of the screen The call ends 1 If the received voice is too quiet to hear you can adjust the volume of the received voice gt For more details about Volume refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 88 O Depending on the caller ID service the phone number of the received call may not be displayed Unknown appears instead O You may hear a noise when you hang up the phone Making a phone call You can make a phone call in many different ways Direct dialing 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Dial 3 Input the phone number and then touch to make a call Fron Y 7 Ti g i Js To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch BEREE 4 Toend the call touch gg at the top right of the screen Dialing from the dialed number history or the received call history 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Dialed Numbers or Received Calls The list of either one appears 3 Touch a name or telephone number from the list to make a call Date and time of the call dialed or received Pay MV FARENTS To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch BEREE
249. ng the Setting of Navigation Interruption Screen 50 Changing the Map Color 50 D Setting a Route to Your Destination Searching for Points of Interest POI Statewide 51 Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facilities 51 Searching for POIs by specifying a category first 52 Searching for POIs by specifying a city name first 53 Finding a POI in the Vicinity 53 Searching for the facilities around the Current position 53 Searching for the facilities around the scroll cursor 54 Searching for Your Destination by Specifying the Teleohone Number 55 Route Calculation to Your Home Location or to Your Favorite Location 55 Selecting Destination from Destination History and Address Book 56 Registering deleting POI Shortcuts 56 Registering a POI shortcut 56 Deleting a POI shortcut 57 D Registering and Editing Locations Registering Locations Overview 58 Registering your home and your favorite location 58 Registering a Location into Address Book 59 Registering a location by scroll mode 59 Registering a location by Address Book 59 Viewing Address Book 60 Editing the entry in Address Book 60 Deleting the entry in Address Book 63 Operating Destination History 64 Deleting the entry in Destination History 64 D Using Traffic Information Using XM Navlraffic Information 65 Viewing traffic list 65 Confirming t
250. ng to the Audio source screen AV Operation Source Off gt Turning the Audio source off AV Operation Traffic Channel gt Recalling the memorized traffic channel for XM or SiriusConnect universal tuner AV Operation gt Change Source CD DVD AM FM TV MCD AV Input AUX Sirius iPod XM EXTERNAL7 EXTER NAL2 Music Library gt Switching to the desired audio source You cannot switch to an unavailable source Give the following verbal commands after switching the correspond audio source Operation for Multi CD AV Operation Disc 7 to Disc 12 gt Selecting the disc for playback JIOA YZIM Wa SAs UOI eEHIAeN nog Huljessdo Operation for FM AV Operation Preset 7 to Preset 6 gt Switching to that preset station directly AV Operation Change Band Switching the band Operation for AM AV Operation Preset 7 to Preset 6 gt Switching to that preset station directly Operation for TV AV Operation Preset 7 to Preset 72 Switching to that preset station directly AV Operation Change Band Switching the band Operation for XM SIRIUS tuner AV Operation Preset 7 to Preset 6 gt Switching to that preset station directly AV Operation Change Band Switching the band Chapter ED Operating Your Navigation System with Voice AV Operation Category Mode Switching to the Category mode AV Operation All Channel Mode Switching
251. ng to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch Update Title Information search begins When the title in formation is obtained the candidates screen appears 3 Select the desired album title from the list The title information is updated to the one you selected Chapter Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS 14 Operating the XM Satellite Radio You can use the navigation system to control an XM satellite digital tuner which is sold se parately For details concerning operation refer to the XM tuner s operation manuals This section provides information on XM operations with the navigation system which differs from that described in the XM tuner s operation man ual m Selecting XM as the source Touch the source icon and touch XM gt For details refer to Se ecting a source on page 97 Screen configuration GEX P10XMT GEX P920XM All CH Mode XM bh 02a PoP Run Snow Patrol GEX P910XM GEX P900XM About the logo for channel name Only the logo data that is contained in the na vigation system can be displayed for each channel The logo of a newly established chan nel that is not contained cannot be displayed When no logo can be displayed the following substitute icon is displayed Substitute icon i Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 XM band indicator Shows the XM band which has been selected 3 XM channel number indicator Shows
252. nged to selected scale Notes e These commands are available only when km mile setting is mile e This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode Map Operation Change Scale XXXX mile s yards Scale lt 25 yards Scale 50 yards Scale 100 yards Scale 0 25 miles Scale 0 5 miles Scale 0 75 miles Scale 1 mile Scale 2 5 miles Scale 5 miles Scale 10 miles Scale 25 miles Scale 50 miles Scale 100 miles Scale 250 miles Scale 500 miles Scale 1000 miles Scale gt Map screen will be changed to selected scale Notes e These commands are available only when km mile setting is Mile amp Yard e This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode Map Operation Change Scale Zoom Out Zoom In Map screen will zoom out or zoom in JIOA UZIM Wa sAs UOI eEHIAeN nog Huljessdo Operating the view mode Map Operation Change View Mode gt Map View Driver s View 2D Twin Map View 3D Twin Map View Route View Guide View Rear View Vehicle Dynamics Map screen will be changed to selected view mode Operating the map orientation Map Operation Heading Up North Up gt Map orientation will be changed Recalculating the route Route Options Change Route Rerouting Use Main Road Use Fast Route Use Short Route Use Freeway Avoid Freeway Use Ferry Avoid Ferry Use Toll Road Avoid Toll Road If the route already set touch VOICE icon to re calculate
253. ngest broadcast stations sequentially Touch and hold BSSM BSSM starts The 12 strongest broadcast sta tions will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 P12 in order from the lowest channel Up O To cancel the storage process touch Can cel O Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may replace current broadcast stations stored in preset memory 138 En Chapter Using the AV Source AV EXT AUX C Operating the AV Input source CAUTION For safety reasons visual images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view vi sual images you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route For details refer to 70 ensure safe driving on page 22 Selecting AV INPUT as the source 1 AV Input is set to Video gt For details refer to Setting the video input on page 150 2 Touch the source icon and touch AV INPUT gt For details refer to Se ecting a source on page 97 Operating the External Unit The term external unit refers to future Pioneer devices that are not currently planned for or devices that allow control of basic func tions although they are not fully controlled by the navigation system Two external units can be controlled by this navigation system When two external units are connected the naviga tion system allocates them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 For details concerning operation refer to the external uni
254. ngs on page 187 clear your cellular phone will not be reflected to Phone Settings and delete it together the dialed number history or phone book in with other functions the navigation system e With some cellular phones the speakers of e You cannot make a call to the entry of an the system may not produce a ring sound unknown user no phone number in the re e f private mode is selected on the cellular ceived call history phone hands free phoning may not be per e f calls are made by operating your cellular formed phone no history data will be recorded in the navigation system About registration and connection e Cellular phone operations varies depending About phone book transfer on the type of your cellular phone Refer to e With some cellular phones it may not be the instruction manual that came with your possible to transfer all items in the phone cellular phone for detailed instructions book at one time In this case transfer items one at a time from your cellular About making and receiving calls e You may hear a noise in the following situa tions When you answer the phone by using the button on the phone When the person on the other end of line hangs up the phone e f the person on the other end of the phone call cannot hear the conversation due to an echo decrease the volume level for hands free phoning This may reduce the effects of the echo e With some cellular phones even if you
255. not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch panel keys Touch Recall the preset station Touch and hold Store the broadcast station You can register the frequency currently being received to the preset list You can ea sily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a key Touch to recall the preset frequency Up to 18 stations 6 for each of three FM bands can be stored in memory 2 Touch Perform manual tuning To perform manual tuning touch iia or MESEJ briefly The frequencies move up or down one step Touch and hold Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning keep touching UTE or gaa for about one second and release The tuner will scan the fre quencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found You can cancel seek tuning by touching either KEETE or gy briefly Ifyou keep touching KERZE or ZE you can skip broadcasting fre quencies Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys O You can also perform these operations by using TRK lt gt button 3 Tune in strong signals gt For details refer to Juning in strong sig nals on page 109 4 Store the strongest broadcast frequen cies En Chapter olpey pue ana GAG UI 1Ng a24n0S AY a4 Bursn 3 Chapter Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio gt For details refer to Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies on the next page
256. nt to manually select the cellu lar phone to be used e You want to reconnect a disconnected cel lular phone e Connection cannot be established automa tically for some reason O Unregistered cellular phones cannot be connected 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your cellular phone For some cellular phones no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech nology For details refer to the instruction manual of your cellular phone 2 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 3 Touch Phone Settings The phone settings screen appears Phone name currently connected or selected as a target of connection Phone Settings Connection Wy mobile phone Registration Orvice Name PIONEER HOO MAY Password Buluoud 32 1j spueH Buisn Chapter ED Using Hands free Phoning 4 Touch Connection 5 Touch the name of the cellular phone that you want to connect When a connection is successfully estab lished a connection complete message ap pears and the system returns to the phone menu screen O To cancel the connection to your cellular phone touch Cancel O If connection fails check whether your cel lular phone is waiting for a connection Then repeat the procedure from step 4 Editing the device name You can change the device name to be dis played on your cellular phone Default is PIONEER HDD NAVI 1 Touch Information in th
257. nternational Air port and you want to operate Go to lt POlI Name gt say Go to San Francisco Interna tional Airport or Go to SFO You can vo calize lt POI Name gt included in the following categories only Railway Station City Center Airport Ferry Terminal Airline Access Golf Courses Shopping Center Parks and Recreation Area For lt Registered location s pronunciation gt shown on the following chart say the regis tered pronunciation For example if the re gistered pronunciation in address book is My office and you want to operate Search by entry on the address book say My office You can hear and edit the pro nunciation gt For details refer to Changing a pronun ciation on page 62 For lt Registered phone book s pronuncia tion gt shown on the following chart say the registered pronunciation For example if the registered pronunciation in phone book is My friend and you want to operate Telephone Book say My friend You can hear and edit the pronunciation gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Phone Book on page 84 For lt Album playlist name gt lt Artist play list name gt lt lIrack name gt shown on the following chart say the name in the music library if you edited their pronunciation say their pronunciation You can hear and edit the pronunciation JIOA YUM Wia SAs UO IeHIAeN ANOA Burzesado en 1
258. o display the contents My Favorites pu Sports gt MPL Atlanta Falcons Sports o NFL Carcina Panthers Sports Goll Sports gt Mascar Sports gt MBA Allanta Hawke Sports MBA Atlanta Hawks Don 25 am All a2 O2 Sports provided by Hats ine Deleting favorite browsable information 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch My Favorites 2 Touch Delete 3 Touch the items you want to delete Sports gt NFL Ailanto Falcons 62 NFL Carglna Panthers Goll Nascar feo HBA Allants Hawke UOI JEULIOJU 1943 0 pue uN WX Buisn Chapter KD Using XM Tuner and Other Information A red check appears next to the items you touched O To delete all favorite contents touch AII Red checks will appear next to all items 4 Touch Delete 5 A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion Touch Yes Checking the Reception Status of the XM Tuner The current XM tuner s GEX P10XMT recep tion status and signal strength appear on screen The information that is transmitted via XM DATA cable is displayed in this screen Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch XM Status WM Status status Sanil Strength Radio Status Depending on the XM tuner s GEX P10XMT reception status any one of the following may appear OK No problem Updating Updating encryption code Check Antenna Improper antenna connec
259. o the one you se lected In the playlist edit mode touching Yes changes the artist name to the one you selected Sorting the playlists The playback order of playlists in the group can be changed O If there is only one playlist the playback order cannot be changed 120 En 1 Enter the playlist edit mode gt For details refer to Switching to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch Sort Playlists 3 Touch the playlist that you want to change the order for Tl 1 sound vision soul 3 Tha worlds frat 2 an3 Comming gener ation l Wl 6 01 01 22 80 S08 Actas guide 4 Touch M F or hd to determine the po sition you want to put E 1 amm vision sm D2 Tho worlds first 03 Comenng generation 14 06 01 00 12 50 D5 Act as guide 5 03 The worlds first 1 03 Comia generation I ll 1s eeu viston soul 04 06 0101 12 60 D5 Act s guide AY Moves playlists by page Aki Moves playlists one by one 5 Touch the selected playlist again The position of that playlist is fixed 6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the playback order of other playlists 7 Touch ESC The new order is fixed and the system returns to the normal playback screen Chapter Using the AV Source Music Library 13 Sorting the tracks in My Mix My Favorite playlist The playback order of tracks in My Mix play list and My Favorite playlist can be chan ged 1
260. oded on the disc during manufacture These discs may contain such information as the CD title track title and artist s name These discs are called CD TEXT discs O When multiple options for the title informa tion are found or no title information exists is displayed O The title information displayed on the CD playback screen and the recording screen is synchronized with the one edited in the music library Once you edit the title infor mation in the music library the title dis played on each screen will change accordingly gt For details refer to Editing a playlist or tracks on page 117 O Up to 32 characters can be entered But the navigation system incorporates propor tional font Therefore the number of the characters that you can display varies ac cording to the type of character Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio O Ifthe built in DVD drive does not operate properly an error message may be dis played gt For details refer to Messages for Audio Functions on page 184 Touch panel key operation Touch panel keys i sound vision soul i Brive id Baf OT Drive i ell Eyo b oye Ps 04 integration sd PREMIER ll Brilliance Select a desired track from the list Touch a desired track to play 2 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause 3 Touch Skip the track forward or back ward Touching gt l skips to
261. olely as an aid to property of the provider and the provider is you in the operation of your vehicle It is responsible for such content not a substitute for your attentiveness O Keep this manual handy as a reference for judgment and care when driving operating procedures and safety informa O Do not operate this navigation system or tion the rear view camera option if purchased if O Pay close attention to all warnings in this doing so will divert your attention in any manual and follow the instructions care way from the safe operation of your vehicle Tully Always observe safe driving rules and fol O Do not install this navigation system where low all existing traffic regulations If you ex perience difficulty in operating the system or reading the display park your vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake before making the necessary adjustments it may i obstruct the driver s vision ii im pair the performance of any of the vehicle s operating systems or safety features in cluding air bags or hazard lamp buttons or iii impair the driver s ability to safely oper ate the vehicle En 21 Chapter KD Before Using the System O Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle It you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled Never use headphones while driving Additional Safety
262. om XM NavTraffic Displaying a list of traffic information Displaying traffic information on a map Suggesting a route to avoid traffic con gestion by using traffic information O The term traffic congestion in this section indicates the following types of traffic infor mation stop and go stopped traffic closed blocked roads This information is always taken into consideration when checking your route and the information related with these events cannot be turned off If you select other traffic information in Traffic Settings the information can be displayed in a list or on a map gt For details refer to Selecting traffic informa tion to display on page 69 Viewing traffic list Traffic Information is displayed on screen ina list This allows you to check how many traffic incidents have occurred their location and their distance from your current position Checking all traffic information Traffic information except traffic flow informa tion is displayed onscreen in a list 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu then touch Traffic Events The list with received traffic information is shown 2 Touch or H to view the incident list Places street names where incidents have occurred are displayed in the list had 1 CAMINO DEL HORTE Direction WORTH Road construcion aur ie ihe ng BRS m E CAMINO DEL WORTE Direction SOUTH we Road construction darme the nig 851m
263. omizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Chapter Language Code Chart for DVD Language code input code Japanese ja 1001 English en 0514 French fr 0618 Spanish es 0519 German de 0405 Italian it 0920 Chinese zh 2608 Dutch nl 1412 Portuguese pt 1620 Swedish sv 1922 Russian ru 1821 Korean ko 1115 Greek el 0512 Afar aa 0101 Abkhazian ab 0102 Afrikaans af 0106 Amharic am 0113 Arabic ar 0118 Assamese as 0119 Aymara ay 0125 Azerbaijani az 0126 Bashkir ba 0201 Belorussian be 0205 Bulgarian bg 0207 Bihari bh 0208 Bislama bi 0209 Bengali Bangla bn 0214 Tibetan bo 0215 Breton br 0218 Catalan ca 0301 Corsican co 0315 Czach cs 0319 Welsh cy 0325 Danish da 0401 Bhutani dz 0426 Esperanto eo 0515 Estonian et 0520 Basque eu 0521 Persian fa 0601 Finnish fi 0609 Fiji fj 0610 Faroese fo 0615 Frisian fy 0625 Irish ga 0701 Scottish Gaelic gd 0704 Galician gl 0712 Language code input code Guarani gn 0714 Gujarati gu 0721 Hausa ha 0801 Hindi hi 0809 Croatian hr 0818 Hungarian hu 0821 Armenian hy 0825 Interlingua ia 0901 Interlingue ie 0905 Inupiak ik 0911 Indonesian in 0914 Icelandic is 0919 Hebrew iw 0923 Yiddish ji 1009 Javanese jw 1023 Georgian ka 1101 Kazakh kk 1111 Greenlandic kl 1112 Cambodian
264. on 10 En junction with this navigation unit will be referred to as the Rear Display Video image Video image in this manual indicates the moving image trom DVD Video in the built in DVD drive or from the equipment that is con nected to this system with an AV BUS or RCA cable such as a TV tuner or general purpose AV equipment Color difference of the map display between day and night a ALL i Agn H ii i i 1 vere a ilm EAL WHITSETT A Night display The examples in this manual are illustrated using the daytime display When driving at night the colors you see may differ from those shown m Chapter Introduction cH License Agreement PIONEER AVIC Z3 for U S A THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AS THE END USER AND PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC PIONEER PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS BY USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT THE SOFT WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS SUPPLIERS AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV PRED BY THE SUPPLIERS SEPARATE TERMS WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT Refer to page 15 IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS WITHIN FIVE 5 DAYS OF RECEI
265. oning for your reference gt For details refer to Notes for hands free phoning on page 86 O When the power of the navigation system turns off the Bluetooth connection is also disconnected When the system restarts the system automatically attempts to re connect the Previously connected cellular phone Even when the connection is cut for some reason the system automatically re connects the specified cellular phone ex cept when the connection is cut by the cellular phone operation You can open Phone Menu directly by press ing and holding MENU button Phone Menu Woot Phone Book ot eee ate Favorites Bus Card umbers j Wieceived E phone Calls Setlings O You can check the signal strength for con nection between your cellular phone and Bluetooth unit sold separately with Con nection Status in Hardware Menu gt For more details about Connection Status refer to Checking the connections of leads and installation positions on page 90 O You can set the voice volume and ring vo lume with Volume in Settings Menu gt For more details about Volume refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 88 gt For more details about Volume refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 88 O You can set to mute peripheral sounds dur ing hands free phoning gt For more details about Mute Set refer to Switching the muting attenuatio
266. or 24 En music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the right owners Notes when writing data to the hard disk drive at low temperature Writing to the hard disk drive Such as record ing music to the music library may be dis abled when the navigation system detects abnormally low temperatures inside the vehi cle Functionality will become available once the temperature inside the vehicle returns to normal Additionally if the low temperature continues for a long time the system may be booted up with the preliminary mode because the system can not recognize the hard disk drive gt For details refer to When the Hard Disk Drive is Disconnected on page 197 Points about recording O Pioneer does not compensate for the con tents that could not be recorded or any loss of recorded data due to a malfunction or failure of the navigation system O The data recorded on the navigation system is not allowed to be used without permis sion from its right holder under copyright law except for personal entertainment Make sure to check the recording operation before recording and check the recorded contents after recording O Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs Chapter Before Using the System 02 Data saved or recorded by the customer O The data saved or recorded onto this navi gation system by the customer cannot be extracted from the navigation system and those services c
267. or Radio AM Selecting AM as the source Touch the source icon and touch AM gt For details refer to Selecting a source on page 9 Screen configuration M Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Preset number indicator Shows what preset has been selected 3 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned 4 Preset list display Shows the preset list 5 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on Touch panel key operation Touch the source icon and then touch AM to select the radio AM When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio Touch panel keys Select a desired frequency from the list Touch to recall the preset frequency To register the frequency currently being received to the preset list touch and hold the preset list Touch and hold Store broadcast sta tions You can register the frequency currently being received to the preset list You can ea sily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a key Touch to recall the preset frequency Up to 6 stations can be stored in mem Ory 2 Touch Perform manual tuning To perform manual tuning touch iia Or MEZE briefly The frequencies move up or down one step Touch and hold Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning keep touching UTE o RE for abo
268. or voice operation 161 Voice commands related to navigation 161 Voice commands related to hands free phoning 164 Voice commands related to AV operation 165 Contents aa After checking traffic information manually 167 Location screen A and B 167 Other Voice Commands 168 Other voice commands for navigation operation 168 Other voice commands for AV operation 170 Category list for vicinity search 172 Appendix Troubleshooting 174 Messages and How to React to Ihem 179 Messages for Audio Functions 184 Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Settings 187 Setting items to be deleted 188 f system errors frequently occur 190 Completely returning the navigation system to the initial state 190 Adjusting the Response Positions of the Touch Panels Touch Panel Calibration 190 Positioning Technology 191 Positioning byGPS 191 Positioning by dead reckoning 192 How do GPS and dead reckoning work together 192 Handling Large Errors 193 When the positioning by GPS is impossible 193 Vehicles that Cannot Obtain Speed Pulse Data 194 Conditions Likely to Cause Noticeable Positioning Errors 194 When the Hard Disk Drive is Disconnected 197 Route Setting Information 197 Route search specifications 197 Detail Information for Playable Media 199 DVD discs and other DVD media types 199 About playing DualDisc 199 About AVCHD recorded discs
269. our In such a case the current lo cation of your vehicle may not be displayed correctly while in a traffic congestion orina parking lot m Appendix Appendix c When the Hard Disk Drive is Disconnected If there is no hard disk drive because of repair or service you can operate only the Radio source without the hard disk drive The following screen also may appear because the hard disk drive can not run due to low tem perature In such a case park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the ignition switch off After the temperature inside the vehicle re turns to normal turn the ignition switch on 76 1MHz Only the following operations are available Other functions cannot be operated e Only the FM and AM sources can be oper ated Preset station select cannot be oper ated e f the selected source before ejecting the hard disk drive is AV the AV INPUT source is available on Rear display If the selected source is DVD nothing is output to Rear display If the selected source is MIRROR the same image as Front dis play is output to Rear display e Rear view camera is available only when the vehicle is backing up Rear View is not available Route Setting Information Route search specifications Your navigation system sets a route to your destination by applying certain built in rules to the map data This section provides some use ful information about h
270. oute the distance to the destination or waypoint appears When the vehicle po sition is not on the route the linear dis tance to the destination or waypoint appears 4 Street name or city name that your vehi cle is traveling along 5 Compass The red arrow indicates north If the scale is less than 25 mile 50 km touching the map changes the direction that it is displayed in north up heading up When the scale of the map is greater than 25 mile 60 km it is fixed to North up e Heading up The map display always shows the vehi cle s direction as proceeding toward the top of the screen En Ae dsig dew au peasy 0 MOH Chapter KD How to Read the Map Display e North up The map display always has north at the top of the screen 6 Zoom in Zoom out Touch to change the map s scale gt For details refer to Changing the scale of the map on the next page 7 Map scale The scale of the map is indicated by distance VOICE icon Touch to change to the voice recognition mode O This is displayed only when the micro phone for voice recognition is con nected gt For details refer to Chapter 18 Traffic status This appears when an XM satellite radio tuner GEX P10XMI sold separately is connected and traffic information is received TRFC No problem ANTENNA Improper antenna connection UPDATING Updating encryption code gt For details refer to Checking the R
271. ow a route is set A CAUTION When a route is calculated the route and voice guidance for the route is automatically set Also for day or time traffic regulations only informa tion about traffic regulations at the time when the route was calculated is shown One way streets and street closures may not be taken into consid eration For example if a street is open during the morning only but you arrive later it would be against the traffic regulations so you cannot drive along the set route When driving please follow the actual traffic signs Also the system may not know some traffic regulations e The calculated route is one example of the route to your destination decided by the na vigation system whilst taking the type of streets or traffic regulations into account It is not necessarily an optimum route In some cases you may not be able to set the streets you want to pass If you need to pass a certain street set the waypoint on that street e The route set by your navigation system may not use the streets known to local dri vers such as small streets or special roads e Some route options may become the same route If waypoints are set only one route is calculated e lf the destination is too far there may be in stances where the route cannot be set If you want to set a long distance route going across several areas set waypoints along the way e During voice guidance turns and intersec tions from the
272. pendix c Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Settings You can return settings or recorded contents to the default or factory settings There are four methods to clear user data and the situa tions and the cleared contents are different for each method For the contents that are cleared in each method see the list presented later O The map data and the system data are not cleared from the hard disk drive by any clearing method Method 1 RESET button Pressing RESET button clears almost all set tings of the audio function CO cra wD The system becomes the same state when the battery of the vehicle is removed or the yellow lead of the navigation system is disconnected Method 2 Restore Factory Settings Clears some items in Map menu and in Set tings menu Epin a valume E Harare Defined Backsround Locations Pichre Sotting Destination a Mag Restore Deno Modify Mode Current Fachary 4 dma gt For details refer to Restoring the Default Set ting on page 96 Method 3 Reset on start up Clears the setting values stored in the hard disk drive Clear user intormation drom hard dsk ji Cancel gt For details refer to f system errors fre quently occur on page 190 Method 4 Clear user information from hard disk on start up Clears all user data including Music Library stored in the hard disk drive Cancel gt For details refer to
273. perate Select an XM band Touch Band repeatedly until the desired XM band is displayed XM 1 XM 2 or XM 3 This is useful for switching the pre set 6 Switching the touch panel keys to next page D Memorizing the current song The song title and artist name being broad cast will be memorized in My Mix When a song that matches the song information memorized in My Mix is broadcast you can tune the channel to the one that is broadcasting that song gt For details refer to Memorizing the song title and the artist name of a song on the next page Setting the notification of the memor ized songs You can set an alert for the songs memor ized in My Mix You can also delete the memorized song gt For details refer to Setting the alert for each memorized song on the next page gt For details refer to Deleting the memor ized songs on page 127 Selecting an XM channel directly You can select an XM channel directly by entering the desired channel number Enter the channel number touch Enter and then touch Back To cancel the input numbers touch Clear This function in not available with GEX P900XM Switching the touch panel keys to pre vious page di Switching the channel category Touch Up or Down to select the desired category 2 Switching the XM information Each touch of DISP changes the display on the bottom of the detail information as follows GEX P900XM
274. peration for a picture bigger than this size O After changing a set image that was im ported from a CD R RW you must use the CD R RW where the image is re corded to restore the previous Splash Screen Precautions when changing the Splash Screen The following is the default Splash Screen for the Navigation System PIONEER Original If an image other than the one shown above is previously set Such as an image from the dealer or other source and you change the Splash Screen once you must use the CD R RW where the image is recorded to restore the previous Splash Screen Using the Demonstration Guidance This is a demonstration function for shops After a route is set the simulation of the route guidance to a destination is automatically dis played Normally set this to Off 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu 2 Touch Demo Mode to change the set ting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting On Repeat demo drive Off default Demo Mode is set off Correcting the Current Location Touch the screen to adjust the current position and direction of the vehicle displayed on the map 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Modify Current Loca tion 2 Scroll to the position where you want to set then touch OK 3 Touch the arrow key on the screen to set the direction then touch OK Chapter SUO I UN UO ZEHIAEN 104 SHulj
275. perform these operations by using TRK lt gt button 4 View upper contents D 114 En Touching displays the contents of the upper playlist or group O You cannot touch on the group se lection screen gt For more details about Relationship of groups playlists and tracks refer to Screen configuration on page 112 Display group selection screen You can search a track from categories gt For more details about Search for a play list refer to Searching a track from the play list on this page Display the details information screen Displays the information about the track or playlist displayed in blue on the track list On the details information you can delete the track or edit the track information gt For details refer to Editing a playlist or tracks on page 117 Touch and hold Register the track in My Mix gt For details refer to Registering a track to My Mix playlist in one action on page 116 Repeat play Each touch of changes the repeat range as follows e Track Repeat Repeat just the current track e Playlist Repeat Repeat just the cur rent playlist e No display Repeat the currently se lected group O Repeat play may stop if you perform an operation that affects a track outside the repeating range during track repeat play O Ifyou perform random play or scan play during track repeat play the repeating range changes to Playlist Repeat Play tra
276. prehen sive it should answer your most common problems If a solution to your problem cannot be found here contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility Problems in the screen Symptom Cause Action See Power doesn t turn on The navi Leads and connectors are incor Confirm once more that all connections are gation system doesn t operate rectly connected correct The fuse is blown Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing then replace the fuse Be very sure to install a cor rect fuse with the same rate Noise and other factors are causing Refer to Page 187 and carry out appropriate the internal memory to operate in measures correctly The hard disk drive is not working Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle because the temperature is extre falls or rises mely low or high When the ignition switch is This system confirms whether a This is a normal operation turned ON or turned to ACC disc is loaded or not the motor sounds The navigation does not boot up The power cable is not wired cor Turn the system off and the check the wiring rectly The hard disk drive is not running Wait until the inside of the vehicle warms up because the temperature is too low The hard disk drive is defective Consult your authorized Pioneer dealer You cannot position your vehicle The quality of signals from the GPS Check the GPS signal reception and the posi on the map
277. procedure from what you want to do When you have decided what you want to do you can find the page you need from the Contents C8 En Finding the operation procedure from a menu name If you want to check the meaning of each item displayed on the screen you will find the ne cessary page trom the Display Information at the end of the manual Glossary See the glossary to find the meaning of a term Index The section at the end of this manual provides an index See each term to find the main pages where it is stated Overview for each chapter 2 Before Using the System For safety reasons it is particularly im portant that you fully understand your navigation system before using it Be sure to read this chapter 3 Basic Operation Please read this section if you want to operate the navigation system immedi ately It will explain the basics of this system This section describes the basic opera tions for navigation 4 How to Read the Map Display This section describes how to read the map screen and the method of changing map view or map scale Modifying Map Configurations The behavior of your navigation system de pends on the map display and guidance set tings If you need to change any of the current settings read the relevant section of this chapter Chapter Introduction cH 6 Setting a Route to Your Destination of the initial settings default settings read This sectio
278. purpose of a randomly assigned numeric iden tifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service uoIpnpo u Chapter Introduction The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or war ranties express or implied regarding the ac curacy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Ser vers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Grace note Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new en hanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE QUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFI
279. r the entry of Address Book is set This is anormal operation and not a malfunction Adjust the volume level Turn the attenuator or mute off Check the connection Turn the volume up or down with Volume in Settings menu Turn the volume up or down according to Vo lume in Settings menu Page 88 Set the sound setting of that entry to No Sound Page 63 To turn off the sound output and image pop up select No Sound and No Picture The speed pulse lead is not con cle Dynamics screen Inclination does not move on 3D Calibration Status screen No sound no voice The person on the other end of the phone call cannot hear the conversation due to an echo The registered phone cannot be deleted CD or DVD playback is not pos sible No picture 176 En nected Eg has been set or sound volume is reduced to 0 The voice from the person on the other end of the phone call is output from the speakers and then picked Connect the speed pulse lead Adjust the volume of the guidance or turn ga off Page 88 Use the following methods to reduce the echo Lower the volume on the receiver up by the microphone again creat ing an echo Normally the registered phone can not be deleted The disc is inserted upside down The disc is dirty The disc is cracked or otherwise da maged The files on the CD are an irregular file format The CD format cannot be play
280. raffic information on the map 66 Setting an alternative route to avoid traffic congestion 67 Selecting traffic information to display 69 D Using XM Tuner and Other Information Using the XM Tuner to View Stock Sports and Other Information 70 Displaying stock prices 70 Storing browsable information 70 Displaying favorite browsable Information 71 Checking the Reception Status of the XM Tuner 72 Emergency Info 72 en 3 ED Contents Checking the information registered as Emergency Info 73 Searching for car service in an emergency 74 Registering user information 75 Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display 76 10 Using Hands free Phoning Hands free Phoning Overview 77 Preparing communication devices 77 Setting up for hands free phoning 78 Receiving a phone call 80 Makingaphonecall 81 Transferring the phone book 83 Registering a phone number in Dial Favorites 84 Editing the entry in Phone Book 84 Editing the received call or dialed number history 86 D Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions Entering Settings Menu 88 Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone 88 Customizing the Regional Settings 88 Changing the language for navigation guidance and menu 88 Setting the time difference 89 Customizing the keyboard layout 89 Changing the unit between km and miles 89 Changing the virtual speed of th
281. rce 2 Touch AV Settings The AV Settings screen appears 3 Touch System Settings Ay eu ret Wire Tol SF LR SP Brats Set Mute Level Mkb ETT ANT Tava pa 4 Touch the item you want to change The setting change screen appears or the set ting changes by toggling it Akio Settings Syston Sattings Bayo v d Wide AUK Sotup Mure i o mta Full i wi Wiari Set d Mute ET Amta Level Tel SF ANT Tp CRSP Racha Wiera V Tal VR ae Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Touch Or ERE to move to the next or previous page 5 Change Setting Camera kgut n Camera Batiery Polarity Touch ESC to return to the selected source screen To return to the previous screen touch Back Setting up the built in DVD drive You can change the preference for playing a DVD on the built in DVD drive You can use this menu to change audio subti tle parental lock and other DVD settings Some changes or settings which you have set here may be invalid depending on the features of the DVD disc For details see the disc s in structions You can enter this menu while DVD is se lected as audio source O If you can enter this menu during DVD playback playback will be stopped and re turn to the first chapter Setting the language You can set each desired language for subtitle audio and menu If the selected
282. rch ex W FY oS BF ctonhone E init History Starch Search 4 When the map of the location you want to register is displayed touch OK tantara st The location is registered and the Edit regis tered information screen appears gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Ad dress Book on the next page 5 Touch OK Completes the registration En suo1 e907 Huljzipy pue Hulsa sibay Chapter Registering and Editing Locations Viewing Address Book Sorts the items in the list in order of the re cently used items Active if there are items in the list and current sort is not by last used Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Address Book SUO COHASSET ST 7 E COFFICE a7 BURBANK GLENDALE PA y Bu ie LEMP AVE 7i N ROSE ST i Ty 2 PERSHING SQUARE hi M Home location The item displayed with the icon is the home location Touch to calculate the route gt For details refer to Registering your home and your favorite location on page 58 2 Favorite location The item displayed with the g icon is the favorite location Touch to calculate the route gt For details refer to Registering your home and your favorite location on page 58 3 Address Book entry Touch to calculate the route gi A map of that location can be displayed gt For details refer to Checking the loca tion on the map on page 31 E3 The infor
283. recorded it is automatically recorded in the music li brary hard disk drive O All tracks are automatically recorded Auto in the default setting gt For details refer to Setting the CD recording mode on page 152 Insert the CD that you want to record Recording automatically starts To cancel the recording touch Stop When recording finishes the system returns to the normal playback screen of the CD in the blank between current track and next track O If the CD is scratched or damaged no data can be recorded on that part In sucha case the track that falls on that part may be skipped Recording a CD manually You can record only your favorite tracks in the CD 1 REC Mode is set to Manual gt For details refer to Setting the CD recording mode on page 152 O REC Mode cannot be changed during re cording 2 Play back the track you want to record 3 Touch REC The track being played is recorded When recording finishes the system returns to the normal playback screen of the CD in the end of the track O To cancel the recording touch Stop Recording only the first track of a CD You can record only the first track of the CD This mode is useful when you want to record only the first tracks from multiple CD singles or EPs consecutively 1 REC Mode is set to Single gt For details refer to Setting the CD recording mode on page 152 O REC Mode cannot be changed during re cording
284. reen Cancel Cancel the voice operation Current Location gt Return the current location map screen Voice Helo Pronounces the display words that can be vocalized Next Page Previous Page Switch the page of Voice Help Menu Voice commands related to navigation Give the following verbal commands after switching to the navigation screen Search by address Destination Address gt lt City Name gt gt lt Street Name gt gt lt House Number gt Location Screen A Notes e Select the state province or territory manually before the voice operation e When you say the street name say the street type together lt e g XXXX street xxxx avenue xxxx road xxxxx boule vard etc gt e Some operation may be skipped depending on the address e lf you don t know the street name or house number you can say Area so that your destination can be set to the main point of that city or street Search by Points of interest JIOA YZIM Wa sAs UOI eHIAeN nog Huljessdo Destination gt POI gt lt PO Name gt Location Screen A Destination gt POI gt Go To lt PO Name gt If the route already set touch VOICE icon to start route calculation If there is no route the system starts the route calculation Destination gt POI gt Waypoint lt PO name gt Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation Making phone call to POI Destination POI Call lt PO name
285. reen you can select the following items All Selects all entries None Displayed when all locations are selected Cancels all selected locations 4 Touch Delete 5 Select Yes The data you selected is deleted Alternative option No Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4 O Because deleted data cannot be restored take extra care not to delete by mistake m Operating Destination History The points to which a route has been calcu lated in the past are automatically saved in Destination History O If no location is stored in Destination His tory you cannot select Destination His tory If you perform a route calculation you can select Destination History Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Destination History Destination history Touch to calculate the route 2 Delete Deletes the selected history 3 Back Returns to the previous screen 64 En Deleting the entry in Destination History Items in Destination History can be deleted All entries in Destination History can be de leted at once 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Destination History 2 Touch Delete Delete from History screen appears 3 Select the location you want to delete A check mark appears by the selected loca tion PELE wooo sT me COHASSET 4T a BLY BOURH AVE ETH ST N HILL ST F We H FIQUER
286. ribes how to use Address Search and the basics of using the navigation system 1 Press MENU button to display the navi gation menu 2 Touch Destination in the navigation menu 3 Touch Address Search Select the method for searching the destina tion Chapter Basic Operation CH EE O When entering the characters the system Dosti bats wo M gay Settings g l re F k will automatically search the database for Address Rete BO PH Rout j j j 3 son i pea MM Pa ote all possible options If there is only one let A k ie SS ter that could possibly follow your entry Dustinatien fa n ait that letter will automatically be entered eri EATI jeba g URE i i i i T 3 es O A list appears if multiple options exist Se ie lect the desired one from the list and pro ceed to the next step In rare cases you may need to input the city name to deter mine the city 4 Touch State code key to select the state province or territory If the destination is in another state this changes the state setting O Once the state has been selected you only Operation of state selection screen have to change states when your destina tion is outside of the state that you se uo e130dQC Jiseg lected State code key Selected state n A B to U Z Use to jump to the first state province or Ea territory that starts with that letter The input text is deleted one letter at a time HH
287. rn it On again you have to repeat the procedure from the Step1 Other Functions Selecting the video for Rear display You can choose either to show the same image as the front screen or to show the se lected source on the Rear display 1 Press AV button to switch Audio opera tion screen 2 Touch the source icon and then touch REAR SCREEN AV Source Menu i r Se Aaa el 2 Fi P Pi a w 6 6 KA C Each touch of REAR SCREEN changes the settings as follows e MIRROR The video on the front screen of the navigation unit is output to the Rear display e DVD The video and sound of the DVDs are output to the Rear display e AV Ihe video and sound of AV INPUT are output to the Rear display C1 When MIRROR is selected the following re strictions are applied to Rear display When the TV tuner is connected with AV BUS its Video image cannot be output Connect the TV tuner s rear out put to Rear display directly When selecting Rear View in the map display nothing is displayed All sounds cannot be output for Rear display There is no picture on Rear display while Picture Adjust for Back Camera is carried out The map screen navigation images out put to the Rear display differ from standard NTSC format images There fore their quality will be inferior to the images that appear on the front s
288. roduct We will keep the details of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft 2 Receive updates on the latest products and technologies 3 Download owner s manuals order product catalogues research new products and much more 4 Receive notices of software upgrades and software updates En 25 Chapter KD Basic Operation Flow from Startup to Termination At first please confirm the positions of the fol lowing features using the Hardware Manual e MAP button e MENU button e AV button e OPEN CLOSE button 1 Start the engine to boot up the system After a short pause the navigation splash screen comes on for a few seconds When you use the navigation system for the first time Regional Settings screen appears On Regional Settings screen you can change the language or time The settings can also be changed afterward gt For details refer to Customizing the Regional Settings on page 88 2 Check the details of the caution mes sage and touch OK You can operate the navigation system by touching keys displayed on the screen The map of your surroundings is displayed If the route is already set the screen changes to route guidance mode gt For details reter to Switching the view mode on page 38 gt For details refer to Setting the time differ ence on page 89 To protect the LCD screen from dam
289. route is calculated the route and O Traffic restrictions and advisories currently voice guidance for the route is automatically set Also for day or time traffic regulations only information about traffic regulations at the time when the route was calculated is shown One way streets and street closures may not be taken into consideration For ex O Failure to set correct information about the ample if a street is open during the morning local time may result in the navigation sys only but you arrive later it would be against tem providing improper routing and gui the traffic regulations so you cannot drive dance instructions along the set route When driving please fol O Never set the volume of your navigation low the actual traffic signs Also the system system so high that you cannot hear out may not know some traffic regulations side traffic and emergency vehicles O To promote safety certain functions are dis in force should always take precedence over guidance given by the navigation sys tem Always obey current traffic restric tions even if the navigation system provides contrary advice O Read the entire manual before operating abled unless the vehicle is stopped and or this navigation system the parking brake is applied O The navigation features of your navigation The data encoded in the hard disk drive for system and rear view camera option if pur the navigation system is the intellectual chased are intended s
290. rsor to the place you want to set and touch OK 4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you want to register and touch OK The location is registered and the Edit regis tered information screen appears gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Ad dress Book on page 60 5 Touch OK Completes the registration Chapter Registering and Editing Locations Registering a Location into Address Book Address Book can store up to 400 registered locations These can include your home loca tion favorite places and destinations you have already registered Registering a location by scroll mode You can perform the following operation when Registration is selected in Short Cut Selec tion 1 Scroll to the location you want to regis ter 4 7 m i Q ere ea mTserT AVL KU E MATA ITSETT A m E aa i The location is registered and the Edit regis tered information screen appears gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Ad dress Book on the next page 3 Touch OK Completes the registration Registering a location by Address Book 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu then touch Address Book 2 Touch Add hi a A BURBANK GLERDALE PA Bl LEMP AVE HH H ROSE ST MH F A PERSHING SOUARE mi pl pf pl pl pi pl 3 Select the search method search the lo cation and display the map Wires A Pol E ma arch Sea
291. ry Data communication function with XM tuner If you connect the optional XM tuner GEX P10XMT to the navigation system you can use traffic information as a part of the naviga tion function A separate subscription for XM NavTraffic is required In addition if you subscribe to XM Audio ser vices you can utilize the XM display which fea tures station logos and category icons improving your XM Audio experience gt For details refer to Using XM NavIraffic Infor mation on page 65 gt For more details about Listening to XM Sa tellite Radio refer to Using the AV Source XM SIRIUS on page 123 O The icon of each broadcast station is con tained in the hard disk drive based on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio as of October 2007 Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta tion in the future may not be supported by the navigation system and may cause the unit to display incorrect icons A CAUTION Rear View is to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers or while back ing up Do not use this function for entertainment purposes wia sAs au Huis a10jog KD Before Using the System About XM NavtTraffic Service and Pioneer Navigation O XM Navirattic subscription is required and is available only in select markets Check www xmnavtrattic com for service availabil ity pricing information and other details The availabilit
292. s restaurants and amusement parks Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased Playback of a DVD is not pos sible unless it features the same region num ber as the DVD player The navigation system s region number is displayed on the bottom of the navigation unit Route setting The process of determining the ideal route to a specific location route setting is done auto matically by the system when you specify a destination Set route The route marked out by the system to your destination It is highlighted in bright green on the map Title DVD Video discs have a high data capacity en abling recording of multiple movies on a sin gle disc If for example one disc contains three separate movies they are divided into title 1 title 2 and title 3 This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func tions Tracking Marks on the map indicating the route you have traveled TV system NTSC PAL SECAM Different areas of the world use different TV systems North America uses NTSC Europe uses PAL and SECAM and South America uses PAL M PAL N PAL and NTSC x pu ddy Appendix E Appendix Almost all are incompatible with each other To display the video image such as TV or DVD video correctly you may need to coordinate your system at the same TV system or use a multi system equipment VBR VBR is short for varia
293. s found O If you keep touching KERSE or EZE you can skip broadcasting channels Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys O You can also perform these operations by using TRK lt gt button 3 Store the strongest broadcast stations sequentially Twelve channels with strong reception sen sitivity can be registered automatically in the preset list gt For details refer to Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially on the next page 4 Change band Touching Band switches between TV 1 and TV 2 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 P12 you can easily store up to 12 broadcast stations for later recall with a touch of the key When you find a station that you want to store in memory keep touching a preset tuning key P1 P12 The selected station is stored in memory The next time you touch the same preset tuning key P1 P12 the station is recalled from memory To switch between P1 P6 and P7 P12 touch Hor M When the touch panel keys are not displayed you can display them by touching the screen O Up to 24 stations 12 for each of two TV bands can be stored in memory AL POd GD IN 8 gt 4Nnos AY y Busy En 137 Chapter BET Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV O You can also press the PLIST A F button to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys P1 P12 Storing the stro
294. s output via MUTE lead Touch Mute Set in System Settings menu Each touch of Mute Set changes the set tings as follows e Guide Tel VR The volume is muted or at tenuated according to the following condi tions When the navigation outputs the gui dance voice When you use a cellular phone via Blue tooth technology dialing talking in coming call When the voice recognition mode is ac tivated e Tel VR The volume is muted or attenu ated according to the following conditions When you use a cellular phone via Blue tooth technology dialing talking in coming call When the voice recognition mode is ac tivated e Off The volume does not change T Operation returns to normal when the cor respond action is ended The navigation voice guidance itself cannot be attenuated or muted If you want to mute the navigation guidance voice temporarily use gf on the navigation map screen Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Switching the muting attenuation level You can select the muting attenuation level of Mute Set This setting is also effective for a mute signal that has been received trom the MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit O This menu is not available in the following cases Audio source is OFF During muting attenuation 5 1Ch Setup is On Touch Mute Level in System Settings menu Each touch of
295. s the data No Keeps the current entries and then adds new data to the phone book Duplicate data can not be consolidated O If you want to keep the existing phone book select No 4 Check that the following screen is dis played and operate your cellular phone to transfer the phone book entries The system s ready ta racoiva buses carda The phone book entries in your cellular phone are transferred to the navigation system To cancel the transfer touch Cancel T Only the names and telephone numbers can be transferred The transferred data can be edited on the navigation system gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Phone Book on this page Registering a phone number in Dial Favorites You can register up to five entries into Dial Fa vorites from the phone book Registering the phone numbers that you frequently use in Dial Favorites will ease the dialing operation The entries registered in Dial Favorites can be operated from the shortcut menu You can 84 En also operate them with Voice Recognition to make a call 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Phone Menu 2 Touch Dial Favorites 3 Touch Set on any of Favorite 1 Fa vorite 5 tial Favorites Favorite Favorite I Favorite 3 Favorite 4 Favorile 4 4 Touch the entry you want to register The Phone Book Record screen appears 5 Touch OK
296. scale di rectly ik oe Daaf ER j A i ay sar Direct scale key O The icon of the entry in Address Book and the traffic information icon are displayed when the map scale is 10 miles 20 km or lower O Traffic lines are displayed when the map scale is 2 5 miles 5 km or lower 1 POI icons are displayed when the map scale is 0 75 mile 1 km or lower Scroll the map to the location you want to see Touching anywhere on the map changes the map to Scroll mode and the map begins scrolling in the direction you touched The scrolling stops when you release your finger from the screen Pressing MAP button returns you to the map of your surroundings O Touch the area close to the center of the screen to scroll slowly touch near the sides of the screen to scroll quickly Ae dsig dew au pe dy 0 MoH Chapter zy How to Read the Map Display Scroll cursor The position of scroll cursor shows the loca tion selected on the current map 0 When the scale is 0 25 mile 200 m or lower the road appears light blue in the vicinity of the scroll cursor 2 Direction line This is the line connecting between the cur rent location and the scroll cursor The direction towards the scroll cursor is indi cated with a straight line 3 Distance from the current location This shows the distance in a straight line be tween the location indicated by the scroll cur sor and your current location 4
297. screen automatically switches to full screen rear view camera Camera for Rear view mode Rear View can be displayed at all times e g when monitoring an attached trailer etc as a split screen where map information is partially displayed Please be aware that in this setting camera image is not resized to fit and that a portion of what is seen by the camera is not viewable A CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images otherwise screen image may appear reversed O Immediately confirm whether the display changes to a rear view camera image when the shift lever is moved to REVERSE R from another position O When the screen changes to full screen rear view camera image during normal driving switch to the opposite setting in Polarity O Initially this function is set to Off 1 Touch Camera Input in System Settings menu Chapter lensin Olpny YM pazejad Bungas olpny y Guiziwoysn gt Chapter Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual 2 Touch On to turn rear view camera setting on O Unless this setting is On you cannot switch to Rear View mode 3 Touch Polarity to select an appropriate setting for polarity Each time you touch Polarity switches be tween the following polarity e Battery When the polarity of the con nected lead is positive while the shift lever is in the REVERSE R position e GND When the polarity of
298. scs fea turing chapters you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search Current location The present location of your vehicle your cur rent location is shown on the map by a red tri angle mark Default setting A factory setting which applies when you first switch on the system you can customize de fault settings to suit your own needs in the menu Destination A location you choose as the end point of your journey Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi channel audio from up to 5 1 independent channels This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters OO DoLBy DIGITAL Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems DIS is a Surround system delivering multi channel audio from up to 6 independent channels S dts Digital Out DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered tra demarks of DIS Inc Favorite location A frequently visited location Such as your workplace or a relative s home that you can register to allow easy routing GPS Global Positioning System A network of satel lites that provides navigation signals for a vari ety of purposes x ipu ddy Appendix gt Appendix Gracenote Music recognition service Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the Indu
299. service The terms and conditions regarding the Emergency Roadside Assistance service provided by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc are determined solely and exclu sively by Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc Please contact Signature s Nationwide Auto Club Inc for more information The telephone number that appears here by de fault is the toll free number for this service For additional details on registering for this service please check your product registra tion card included with this product If you are not interested in the free Roadside As sistance service this number can be edited and replaced by your own roadside assis tance telephone number O The police number is shown as 911 and cannot be changed Locate Car Service gt For details refer to Searching for car ser vice in an emergency on the next page Dial each number gt For details refer to Dialing the corre sponding number in emergency on the next page UOI EULIOJU 19430 pue uN WX Buisn Chapter 09 Using XM Tuner and Other Information Dialing the corresponding number in emergency A CAUTION This function can be valid only when all following conditions are satisfied e The Bluetooth unit sold separately is con nected with navigation system e The communication for Hands free phoning is activate between the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology and the navigation sys tem 1 Touch Information in the navi
300. sponding datais found Enter the title manually or try to retrieve the Track info due to multiple en in the Gracenote Database but the title by touching Update Title tries in the database system cannot select one to append a title All artist names in the playlist f you try to delete the artist name If you enter the artist name again the artist have been deleted because entirely The artist will not be dis name appears no character has been en played in the artist group and artist tered Do you want to pro name on the information plate also ceed will not be displayed Other sources Message When What to do See Search failed iPod is preparing playback There Wait until Ready disappears and try the op fore the operation is invalid now eration Invalid command the memo If you try to memorize 000 Chan Tune an appropriate channel and memorize has not been stored nel to My Mix it e If you try to memorize a channel that is OFF AIR to My Mix e If you try to memorize a channel to My Mix while an XM tuner error OCCUIS Invalid command the CH has If you try to memorize 000 or 001 Tune an appropriate channel and memorize not been stored Channel to T button s preset it e If you try to memorize a channel that is OFF AIR to T button s preset e If you try to memorize a channel to T button s preset while an XM tuner error occurs Appendix ED Appendix Appendix Ap
301. stry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com racenote E gt g Guidance mode The mode in which guidance is given as you drive to your destination the system automati cally switches to this mode as soon as a route has been set Guidance point These are important landmarks along your route generally intersections The next gui dance point along your route is indicated on the map by the yellow flag icon Home location Your registered home location ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track related information in a MP3 file This embedded in formation can include the track title the ar tist s name the album title the music genre the year of production comments and other data The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tag editing functions Although the tags are restricted to the number of characters the information can be viewed when the track is played back ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for mat logic of DVD CD ROM folders and files For the ISO9660 format there are regulations for the following two levels Level 1 The file name is in 8 3 format the name con sists of up to 8 characters half byte English 206 En capital letters halt byte numerals and the _ sign with a file extension of three characters Level 2 The file name can have up to 31 characters in clu
302. suoleinbijuoD dew bulAjipow Chapter KD Modifying Map Configurations 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu then touch View Mode 2 Touch the type that you want to set gt For details refer to How to Use the Map on page 38 Setting the Map Color Change between Day and Night To improve the visibility of the map during the evening you can set the timing for changing the combination of the map color 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu 2 Touch Day Night Display to change the setting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting Automatic You can change the colors of a map between daytime and nighttime according to whether the vehicle lights are On or Off Day The map is always displayed with daytime col ors C To use this function with Automatic the Orange white lead of the navigation system must be connected correctly O You can also change the brightness of the screen between daytime and nighttime with Dimmer gt For details refer to Operating the picture adjustment on page 153 m Changing the Setting of Navigation Interruption Screen 1 Touch Map in the navigation menu 2 Touch AV Guide Mode to change the setting Each time you touch the key changes that set ting On Switches from the audio operation screen to the navigation screen Off Does not switch the screen Changing the Map Color You can set the map color to bluish or r
303. t s operation manual This section provides information on external unit opera tions with the navigation system that differ from those described in the external unit s op eration manual O Operation varies depending on the external unit connected In some cases the exter nal unit may not respond Selecting EXT 1 or EXT 2 as the source Touch the source icon and touch EXT 1 or EXT 2 gt For details refer to Se ecting a source on page 97 Screen configuration QO 00 r on ee inet PP LAv Sottingt ao iain Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 External unit indicator Displays any connected external units 3 Auto Manual mode indicator Shows the current mode gt For details refer to Switching the automatic and manual function on the next page Touch panel key operation Touch the source icon and then touch EXT 1 or EXT 2 to select the external unit When the source icon is not displayed you can display it by touching the screen Touch panel keys M Send an A Y lt or gt command Touch to operate the external unit XNY X4 AV 224nN0sS AY y Buisn Chapter IED Using the AV Source AV EXT AUX O Operation varies depending on the exter nal unit connected In some cases some functions may not be used until you touch and hold the key 2 Send a band command Touch to send a band command to the ex ternal unit
304. t to Off gt For details refer to Switching the aux illary setting on page 150 When AV Input is not set to Video gt For details refer to Setting the video input on page 150 O The term external unit refers to future Pioneer devices that are not currently planned for or devices that allow control of basic functions although they are not fully controlled by the navigation system Two ex ternal units can be controlled by this navi gation system When two external units are connected the navigation system allocates them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 1 When Auto ANT mode is set to Radio the vehicle s antenna can be stowed or turned off by following the instructions below Change the source from radio AM or FM to another source Jurn the source off Turn off the ignition switch ACC OFF If Auto ANT mode is set to Power the vehicle s antenna can be stowed or turned off only when the ACC is set to OFF gt For more details about Auto ANT refer to Switching the auto antenna setting on page 151 98 En About Steering Remote Control O When using CD SR1 Steering Remote Control sold separately the following but tons can be used for operation PHONE MENU button Switches to Phone menu when Bluetooth unit sold separately is connected VR ACTIVATION OFF HOOK button Press to accept the call when there is an in coming call In other s
305. tain and the route calculation is impossible The destination or waypoint s are in an isolated island etc without a ferry and the route calculation is im possible If there is no road con nected to your starting point or destination this message will ap pear These messages appear when a ferry route toll roads or freeways are included in the route to the des e Drive your vehicle to an unrestricted area and reset the destination and waypoint s e Set a destination and waypoint s on roads e Reset the destination after you drive the ve hicle to any road Change the destination If the current route is not desired set destina tion or waypoints that do not pass through a tination or waypoints even though a route is set to avoid them You can identify these condition by the icons ferry route toll roads or freeways Page 32 Appendix Appendix c The address does not exist Do you want to continue This area does not contain any POI s of the selected type Failed to make the route pro file There is no Traffic List Use the appropriate data after reading Page There is no pictures folder Please create Pictures folder and store JPEG files in that Folder Data Read error JPEG file is corrupt CAUTION System detected improper connection of Park ing Brake lead Please check your configuration for safety Please see Operation Manual for more information reg
306. te gt For details refer to Register tracks one by one on page 116 Changing the title of the playlist or track You can change titles of playlists or tracks The titles changed here are displayed on the screen 1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit mode gt For details refer to Switching to the edit mode on page 117 2 Touch Title 3 Touch Yes The content to be changed in Step 4 can be re flected to the voice command No Proceeds to the next step without registering it as a voice command 4 Enter a new character string and then touch OK Touch Small to enter lowercase letters Touch Caps to enter uppercase letters Touch to toggle the selection Small ia ihars Hame a The system pronounces the character string once and the pronunciation confirmation message appears No Completes the edit without editing the pronun ciation Repeat You can listen to the pronunciation again O Ifthe pronunciation is not the desired one edit the characters so that the pronuncia tion matches your desired pronunciation 5 Touch Yes The changed character string is fixed and the system returns to the previous screen Changing the pronunciation of a playlist name or track name You can change the pronunciation of a playlist or track name The pronunciation is used as a command for voice recognition O Only pronunciation can be edited for Artist playlist O The n
307. ter your Vehicle s Identification Number When the route is already set Location confir You can enter between 1 and 17 digits mation screen is shown Edit Policy Number gt For details refer to Checking the location Register your insurance policy number on the map on page 31 Ss Fhone l Registering user information Enter the information written on the vehicle in spection certificate or insurance certificate 5 UOI EWLOJU 19430 pue ADUNL WX Buisn 1 Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Emergency Info Edit Insurance Phone Register your insurance company s phone 2 Touch Setup number Edit TOW Service Phone Register a towing company s phone number Touch Default to restore the default TOW service phone number m Chapter KD Using XM Tuner and Other Information Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display You can change the contents of the meters on the left and right of the Vehicle Dynamics Dis play Until the sensor s initial learning is complete only the voltage and clock are available O The speed displayed is a guideline and may not correspond to the actual speed 1 Switch to Vehicle Dynamics Display gt For more details about Changing the map display mode refer to Switching the view mode on page 38 2 Touch the left or right meter Touch panel keys are displayed 3 Touch the items you want to display Direction Meek
308. the disc package the included literature or the disc itself With discs that do not feature a recorded parental lock level you cannot use parental lock 11 With some discs parental lock operates to skip certain scenes only after which normal playback resumes For details refer to the disc s instructions O If you forget the registered code number touch Clear 10 times on the screen in the Step 3 The registered code number is can celed letting you register a new one Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Changing the wide screen mode CAUTION For safety reasons you cannot use some of these navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo tion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22 Touch Wide Mode in System Settings menu The Wide Mode screen appears On the Wide Mode screen you can select the following items Full Just Cinema Zoom or Normal Normal normal A 4 3 picture is displayed normally giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture Full full A 4 3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal di rection only enabling you to enjoy a 4 3 TV pic ture normal picture without any omissions Just just The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases hor izontally toward the ends o
309. the connected lead is negative while the shift lever is in the REVERSE R position Setting the video input You can switch the setting according to the connected component Select Video to watch video of a con nected component as AV INPUT source Touch AV Input in System Settings menu Each touch of AV Input changes the set tings as follows e Off No video component is connected e Video External video component e EXT Pioneer external unit connected with an RCA video cable 1 When a Pioneer external unit is connected with an IP BUS cable select EXT When the audio source is EXT the Video image of the Pioneer external unit can be displayed Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with the navigation system as the one of sources Activate the auxiliary setting when using aux iliary equipment connected to the navigation system Touch AUX Input in System Settings menu Touching AUX Input switches between On and Off 150 En gt For details refer to Selecting AUX as the source on page 141 Switching the muting attenuation timing You can mute the audio source volume or at tenuate the output signal This setting is inva lid for the mute signal has been received from the MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit Even if this setting is Off the naviga tion system will mute or attenuate the audio source volume when the signal i
310. the destination and performing audio operations by voice En 9 KD Introduction Appendix Please read the appendix to learn more about your navigation system and informa tion such as the availability of after care Please see Display Information at the end of this manual to check the details for each item on the menu Terminology Before moving on take a few minutes to read the following information about the conven tions used in this manual They will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new equipment e Hardware buttons on your navigation sys tem are described in ALL CAPITAL BOLD lettering e g MENU button MAP button e tems in the different menus or touch panel keys available on the screen are described in brackets and bold e g Destination Settings e Extra information alternative usages and other notes are presented like this e g O Touch panel keys which are not avail able at this time are grayed out e References to sections that describe infor mation related to the current topics are in dicated like this e g gt For details refer to Modifying the Route Calculation Conditions on page 34 About the definition of terminology Front Display and Rear Display In this manual the screen that is attached to the body of this navigation unit will be referred to as the Front Display Any additional op tional screen that is purchased for use in c
311. the scroll cursor Searching range is approximately 10 miles 16 km square from the scroll cursor O This can be used when Vicinity Search is selected in Short Cut Selection gt For more details about Changing a shortcut refer to Se ecting the Shortcut on page 48 1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cur sor to the place where you want to search for POI 2 Touch gg The shortcut menu appears Chapter Setting a Route to Your Destination 06 3 Touch gg For more details about following operations refer to Step 2 of Searching for the facilities around the current position on page 53 O The distance indicated in the search result is the distance from the scroll cursor to the facility O The bottom icon is for shortcuts to your fa vorite categories Touching the shortcuts icon displays a list of the facilities in a cate gory gt For details refer to Registering deleting POI Shortcuts on the next page O Vicinity Search in the navigation menu searches your surroundings On the other hand in the case of in the Shortcut menu Refer to Shortcut menu on page 45 the area around the scroll cursor after the map is scrolled will be searched Searching for Your Destination by Specifying the Telephone Number If you know the telephone number of your des tination you can quickly search for your desti nation by specifying the telephone number O You can also search for the phone number Phon
312. the signal strength between the Bluetooth unit and the cellular phone If the Bluetooth unit is connected correctly OK is displayed NOK appears when the Bluetooth unit is not connected or incorrectly connected 4 Installation Position Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions The installation position of the navigation system is shown That indicates whether the installation position of the navigation system is correct or not If installed cor rectly OK appears When the navigation system is installed at an extreme angle ex ceeding the limitation of the installing angle Incorrect angle will be displayed When the angle of the navigation system has been changed Excessive vibration will be displayed Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied On is displayed When the parking brake is re leased Off is displayed Power Voltage The power voltage reference value pro vided from the vehicle battery to the naviga tion system is shown If the voltage goes out of the range from 11 V to 15 V check that power cable connection is correct D Illumination When the headlights or small lamps of a ve hicle are on On is displayed When the small lamps of a vehicle are off Off is dis played If the orange white lead is not con nected Off appears Back Signal When the gear lever is shifted to R the signal switches to High or Low One of these is display
313. ther chan nel 2 Press and hold T button for two sec onds or more That Traffic amp Weather channel will be memor ized O Even if you use the XM satellite radio tuner together only one station can be memor ized The station memorized afterward will overwrite the existing one Calling up the memorized Traffic amp Weather channel Press T button O You can call up a Traffic amp Weather channel even from a source other than the SIRIUS SOUICE O To cancel the announcement touch TRFC Off on the screen or press T button again m 132 En Chapter Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV 15 When Pioneer audio equipment is connected Shows which repeat range has been selected to the navigation system using IP BUS or AV Track number indicator BUS such equipment can be operated trom Shows the track currently playing the navigation system This chapter describes Track title indicator the operation of the audio source that can be Shows the title of the track currently playing used when the Pioneer audio equipment is 7 Play time indicator connected When reading this chapter please Shows the elapsed playing time of the current also refer to the operation manual of the AV track equipment connected to the navigation sys Disc number display tem Shows the number of the disc in the multi CD player O The titles of the items marked with an aster Operating the Multi CD Player isk will be displayed only
314. tic image Narrow1 Narrow2 Wide Wide2 AIAN 1 Touch Equalizer in Audio Settings menu 2 Touch Customize The details setting screen appears Chapter ensin Olpny y im pazejas Buras olpny y bulziwioysn gt Chapter Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual 3 Touch lt or gt to select the equalizer band to adjust Each time you touch lt or gt selects equalizer bands in the following order Low Mid High 4 Touch lt or gt to select the desired cen ter frequency Low 40 80 100 160 Hz Mid 200 500 1K 2K Hz High 3 15K 8K 10K 12 5K Hz 5 Touch lt or gt to adjust the level of the equalizer band Each time you touch lt or gt increases or de creases the level of the equalization band 12dB to 12dB is displayed as the level is in creased or decreased 6 Touch lt or gt to select the desired Q Touch lt or gt until the desired the curve char acteristics appears in the display Wide2 Wide1 Narrow1 Narrow2 O To adjust other bands repeat step 3 to step 6 Setting the simulated sound stage You can select the desired effect from various simulated sound stages such as Music Studio or Dynamic Theater You can also adjust a lis tener positioning effect Setting a stage that fits your image 1 Touch Staging in Audio Settings menu 2 Touch desired stage setting Center Position me adi
315. tion Not Connected 2 Signal Strength Depending on the signal strength any one of the following may appear Very Strong Strong Marginal Weak No Signal 12 En 3 Radio ID The radio ID appears O Ifyou have subscribed to either XM audio only or XM Navtirattic stand alone you will see Updating in Status This is because the GEX P10XMT is con stantly checking to see if you have decided to add the other service while your navigation system is turned on If you subscribe to both services the ap propriate status will be shown in Status Emergency Info The Emergency Info screen provides impor tant emergency information pertaining to your vehicle insurance and current location Such emergency information could be useful in the event of an accident or vehicle breakdown The accuracy of the personal information is dependent on the accuracy of the information entered into the navigation system by the user A WARNING The Emergency Info screen is only intended to provide information to a driver that may be useful during an emergency situation and does not re place the need to call for emergency assistance when necessary Chapter Using XM Tuner and Other Information CH Checking the information registered as Emergency Info Touch Information in the navigation menu and then touch Emergency Info o VIM AAA RBR CCC WT Policy number AAA BBB CEC W Lon e aL H Lal 3d ddA
316. tion in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview Route confirmation screen appears 11 Route Overview is displayed only when the route is set 2 Touch Detail Oe _dptions Profile Madeta Waypoinis 3 Touch the screen and place the scroll cursor on the point where you want to view the detail or the entire picture Or zoom in or zoom out the map scale F WEN CH ST 022a q 7 E aK M LOS ROALES AVE LAKE ALE _ E MOUNT ST i i e The map around the scroll cursor is zoomed in or out so you can view the detail or the entire picture 4 Touch Back The screen returns to the previous display O You can also check the overview by using the shortcut menu if Whole Route Over 36 En view is selected on Short Cut Selection Editing Waypoints You can select waypoints locations you want to visit on the way to your destination and you can recalculate the route to pass through these locations Adding a waypoint Up to 5 waypoints can be selected and se lected points can be sorted automatically or manually 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch Route Overview 2 Touch Waypoints The waypoint menu screen appears 3 Touch Add Waypoint List IH E MOUNT T E3 H WILSOH AVE Ki E WASHINGTON BLVD HW WOODBURY R The Select Search Method screen appears After searching for a point display it on a map then touch
317. to the All Channel mode AV Operation gt Memo Memorizing the title and artist information of that song to My Mix Operation for CD AV Operation Change Media gt Switching the CD DA part and CD ROM MP3 part Operation for Music Library AV Operation Music Search Album gt lt Album Playlist name gt Playback the selected album playlist AV Operation Music Search gt lt Album Playlist name gt Playback the selected album playlist Note 2 AV Operation Music Search Artist gt lt Artist Playlist name gt Playback the selected artist playlist AV Operation Music Search lt Artist Playlist name gt Playback the selected artist playlist Note 2 AV Operation Music Search Genre gt lt Genre name gt Playback the selected genre playlist AV Operation Music Search gt lt Genre name gt Playback the selected genre playlist Note 2 AV Operation gt Music Search My Favorites gt My Favorite 1 My Favorite 2 My Favorite 3 My Favorite 4 My Mix Playback selected playlist AV Operation Music Search My Favorite 1 My Favorite 2 My Favorite 3 My Favorite 4 My Mix gt Playback se lected playlist Note 2 AV Operation Track Search gt lt Track name gt Playback the selected track Note 3 Note 2 This operation is available only when that group is already selected Note 3 This operation is available
318. tting the parental lock Some DVD Video discs let you use parental lock to set restrictions so that children cannot watch a violent and adult oriented scenes You can set the parental lock level in steps as de sired O When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock code number input indications may be dis played In this case playback will begin when the correct code number is input 148 En Setting the code number and level When you first use this function register your code number If you do not register a code number parental lock will not operate 1 Touch DVD V Setup in System Settings menu 2 Touch Parental Level 3 Touch 0 9 to input a four digit code number 4 While the input number is displayed touch Enter The code number is registered and you can now set the level 5 Touch any of 1 8 to select the de sired level The parental lock level is set e Level 8 Playback of the entire disc is possible initial setting e Level 7 Level 2 Playback of discs for children and non adult oriented discs is possible e Level 1 Only playback of discs for chil dren is possible O If you want to change the parental level enter the registered code number Proceed to Step 3 T We recommend that you keep a record of your code number in case you forget it The parental lock level is recorded on the disc You can confirm it by looking at
319. tton 3 Display the previous screen Touch on the refine search or other screen to return to the previous screen 4 Narrow down the songs to play back You can narrow down the choices of songs to play from five categories gt For details refer to Browsing for a song on the next page Repeat play Touch repeatedly until the desired re peat range appears in the display e Repeat One Repeat just the current song e Repeat All Repeat all songs in the selected list 6 Shuffle play This function shuffles songs or albums and plays them in random order Each touch of changes the settings as follows e Shuffle Songs Play back songs in random order within the selected list AL POd GD IN 8 gt 4Nnos AY y Busy En 135 Chapter BET Using the AV Source M CD iPod TV e Shuffle Albums Select an album randomly and then play back all songs in that album in order Browsing for a song The operations for controlling an iPod with this navigation system are designed to be close to iPod operation This allows you to search and play songs as you would with an iPod 14 Touch Search If you do nothing about 30 seconds after Steps 1 to 4 are finished the screen returns to the previous screen 2 Touch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song e Playlists playlists e Artists artists e Albums albums e Songs songs e Genres genres Ped AA haraa ii 0845
320. u 2 Touch Settings to display Settings menu 3 Change the setting gt For more details about Adjusting each item refer to Chapter 11 Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone The sound volume for the navigation can be set You can separately set the volume of the route guidance and the beep sound 1 Touch Settings in the navigation menu then touch Volume 2 Touch or to set their volume On this screen you can operate the following items Volume Settings Guidance Bren Phone Ring bone Phone Voica Guidance This setting controls the guidance volume of navigation When set to gif guidance is output When set to gM no guidance is output Beep 88 En This setting controls the beep tone volume for navigation Phone Ringtone This setting controls the incoming ring tone volume Phone Voice This setting controls the incoming voice vo lume O Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice adjust ments are related to the cellular phone fea turing Bluetooth technology No adjustment is needed when the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology is not connected O Volume of the audio source is adjusted by VOL A F button of the navigation system 3 To finish the setting touch OK Customizing the Regional Settings Changing the language for navigation guidance and menu You can select the language to be used for the navigation function Once you change the
321. u ddy Appendix gt Appendix The accuracy of the GPS information depends on how good the reception is When the sig nals are strong and reception is good GPS can determine latitude longitude and altitude for accurate positioning in three dimensions But if signal quality is poor only two dimen sions latitude and longitude can be obtained and positioning errors are somewhat greater Positioning by dead reckoning The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system also calculates your position The current loca tion is measured by detecting driving distance with the speed pulse the turning direction with the Gyrosensor and inclination of the road with the G sensor The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate changes of altitude and corrects for discre pancies in the distance traveled caused by driving along winding roads or up slopes Also the navigation system learns the driving conditions and stores information in the mem ory thus as you drive more the precision of the positioning becomes more accurate The method of positioning changes as follows depending on whether the speed pulse of your vehicle is detected or not 3D hybrid mode This is active when the speed pulse is de tected Inclination of a street can be detected Simple hybrid mode When the speed pulse is not detected posi tioning is performed in this mode Only hori zontal movement is detected so it becomes 192 En less accurate Also w
322. u 5 1Ch Setup 152 Audio Settings ii Systm Settings Weusi Fiene Wane d bi Hi bathe Powerful br al d HPF Mire Lewa tH fd Equalizer 142 Staging 142 FAD BAL 142 Sub Woofer 145 Loudness 145 HPF 146 Source Level 146 System Settings menu Audio Setting vo v Wide Camera Mode Input Full i Wala Buide Level Tol SF TA YR 2il ae a DVD V Setup 147 Wide Mode 149 Camera Input 149 AV Input 150 AUX Input 150 Mute Set 150 Mute Level 151 Guide Tel SP 151 Auto ANT 151 Clock DISP 151 REC Mode 152 204 En Appendix Appendix c Glossary 3D Hybrid sensor The built in sensor which enables the system to estimate your vehicle s position A learning function increases its accuracy and its learn ing data can be stored in memory Address Book A list of locations registered manually Aspect ratio This is the width to height ratio of a TV screen A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4 3 Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16 9 providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere Bit rate This expresses data volume per second or bps units bits per second The higher the rate the more information is available to reproduce the sound Using the same encoding method such as MP3 the higher the rate the better the sound Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book With DVD Video di
323. u can also set a destination by touching uo e130d0C Jiseg 4E to the right of the list Touch OK to set the location indicated by the scroll cursor as your destination 5 Back Returns previous screen Checking the location on the map Location confirmation screen Multigte Route Setions i Profan Optail Waypoints PE Mh27m 5300 ie AO ae Bi Calculating the route to the destination Route calculation starts When the route calculation is completed Route confirma tion screen appears O If you press MAP button or MENU but ton during route calculation the calcu lation is canceled and the map screen appears 2 Scrolling the map The map display changes to the scroll mode You can fine tune the location in the Ee When the route calculation is completed Route confirmation screen appears m Operation of street list screen 0 CALIF ORNL L a a STOCKTON BOULEVARD SHERMAM JW l ETOCKTON BORD STOCKTON CHRIST SCHDEL STOCKTON CREEK RO 7h scroll mode and then you can set the loca STOCKTON CT WH tion as your destination or do various opera FORT STOCKTOM DR W tions by using the shortcut menu gt For details refer to Shortcut menu on page 45 3 Setting the location as a waypoint The location indicated by the scroll cursor will be set as a waypoint M Number of possible choices AM en 31 Chapter KD Basic Operation
324. ual The HDD is not connected Cannot use HDD 182 En The cellular phone s Bluetooth wire less technology is turned off during the registration step Rejection by the cellular phone has received Registration step has failed for some reason If you try to perform another opera tion during automatic connection by the system If you try to connect another phone during automatic connection by the system No available phone exists in the sur roundings when the system searches for the cellular phone fea turing Bluetooth wireless technol ogy for registration If the Bluetooth unit sold sepa rately is disconnected from this na vigation system or Bluetooth unit carries out another processing when the system search the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology for registration If the Bluetooth unit sold sepa rately is disconnected from this na vigation system or the Bluetooth unit carries out another process when you change the device name If you try to perform another opera tion immediately after connection failure If you transferred the data from your cellular phone in a format can not be received with navigation system Disconnection has been made dur ing transfer for some reason steps Failure of the built in hard disk drive has occurred such as internal elec trical problem or file system error Failure of the built in hard disk
325. uring IP BUS Multi When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner GEX CD player Interface adapter for iPod TV P10XMT is connected to the navigation sys tuner is connected tem variety of information other than traffic Using the AV Source AV EXT AUX can be acquired The navigation system n This chapter describes the audio source op also register emergency information This erations that can be used when connecting chapter describes ways of the information AV equipment with an RCA connector AV acquired with XM satellite radio registration input future Pioneer devices external of emergency information unit or auxiliary equipment AUX Using Hands free Phoning When you are using a cellular phone featur ing Bluetooth technology by connecting the Bluetooth unit sold separately to the navigation system you can operate your cel lular phone hands free This chapter de 7 Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual Using the audio source various audio visual settings are available to suit your tastes This chapter describes how to change the ttings scribes the operations related to hands free ere praning Operating Your Navigation System with Voice 1 Modifying the General Settings for Na vigation Functions The behavior of your navigation system de pends a number of general settings for navi gation functions If you need to change any This section describes navigation opera tions such as searching
326. used for voice recognition O If nothing is entered in the text box you cannot use that item as a voice com mand Chapter Registering and Editing Locations O Depending on which language is being switched to you may not be able to use the registered pronunciation without modification gt For details refer to Available Voice Com mands on page 159 3 Phone The phone number of the registered loca tion You can dial this number by using O You can search by registered telephone number 4 Icon The symbol displayed on the map and Ad dress Book O Selects whether to display or hide all of the registered location icons on the map gt For details refer to Setting the tem on the Map Screen on page 46 5 Picture As you approach the location the regis tered image appears You can register the picture stored in the navigation system You can also import and register a picture shot from a digital camera by using a CD ROM 6 Sound The selected sound is played when you ap proach the location D Modify Location You can change the registered location by scrolling the map Only when the Bluetooth unit sold sepa rately is connected to the navigation sys tem and acellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology is also connected you can make a phone call to the registered phone number by touching MAE gt For details refer to Dialing the entry in the Address Book on page 82
327. ut and subwoofer controller on page 152 3 Touch lt or gt to adjust left right speak er balance Each time you touch lt or gt moves the left right speaker balance towards the left or the right Left 9 to Right 9 is displayed as the left right speaker balance moves from left to right Using subwoofer output This navigation system is equipped with a sub woofer output which can be turned on or off O When the subwoofer output is on you can adjust the cut off frequency the output level and the phase of the subwoofer 1 Touch Sub Woofer in Audio Settings menu When Preout the subwoofer controller set ting in System Settings menu is Full you cannot select Sub Woofer gt For details refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 152 2 Touch On to turn subwoofer output on To turn subwoofer output off touch Off 3 Touch Reverse or Normal to select the phase of subwoofer output O If subwoofer output sound is not clear with Normal change it to Reverse 4 Touch lt or gt to select cut off fre quency Each time you touch lt or gt selects cut off fre quencies in the following order 50 80 125 Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se lected range are output from the subwoofer 5 Touch or to adjust the output level of the subwoofer 6 to 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased Using non fading output When th
328. ut menu eA Registration Register the information on the location indi cated by the scroll cursor to the Address book gt For details refer to Registering a Location into Address Book on page 59 g Vicinity Search Find POIs Points Of Interest in the vicinity of the scroll cursor gt For details refer to Finding a POI in the Vici nity on page 53 Gl Overlay POI Displays icon for surrounding facilities POI on the map gt For details refer to Displaying POI on the Map on the next page i Volume Displays Volume gt For more details about Volume refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 88 43 Phone Book 48 En Displays Phone Book gt For details refer to Calling a number in the phone book on page 82 gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Phone Book on page 84 tf Dial Favorite 1 to Dial Favorite 5 Make a call to the phone number registered in Dial Favorites gt For details refer to Registering a phone number in Dial Favorites on page 84 fal Whole Route Overview Displays the entire route currently set gt For details refer to Checking the entire route overview on the map on page 36 Stock Info Displays stock prices gt For details refer to Displaying stock prices on page 0 lt i Set My Favorites Displays the screen of storing browsable item for XM tuner gt For details refer to Storing browsable in
329. ut one second and release The tuner will scan the fre quencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found You can cancel seek tuning by touching either KEETE or REY briefly T If you keep touching or ZE you can skip broadcasting fre quencies Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys O You can also perform these operations by using TRK lt gt button 3 Tune in strong signals gt For details refer to Juning in strong sig nals on the previous page 4 Store the strongest broadcast frequen cies gt For details refer to Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies on this page Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM best stations memory lets you auto matically store the six strongest broadcast fre quencies under preset tuning keys P1 P6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a key Touch and hold BSM BSM starts The six strongest broadcast fre quencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 P6 in order of their signal strength To cancel the storage process touch Can cel Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 P6 Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception 1 Touch Local 2 Touch On to turn local seek tuning on
330. wer If the scale is changed the icons are resized ac cording to the selected scale Traffic event icon and line The traffic event information displayed on the map is as follows Traffic event icon ib S FIGUERA ST tL ANGELES with yellow line Stop and go traffic with red line Stopped traffic Chapter Using Traffic Information CH with black line Closed blocked roads etc For the meaning of the icon see Traffic Set tings in the Information menu gt For details refer to Selecting traffic informa tion to display on page 69 If you want to check the traffic information de tails on the map move the scroll cursor onto an icon such as and touch This allows you to view place names and other detail infor mation Traffic flow information icon and line Red yellow or green blinking lines may ap pear on either side of a road In addition to these blinking lines a round icon with a num ber may appear on the map The number in the icon indicates the actual average speed of that specific area These colors indicate the average speed at which traffic is flowing along these streets Here is a guide to the colors and the average speed they indicate Traffic flow icon Red average speed in this area is between 5 mph to 15 mph 8 km h to 24 km h Yellow average speed in this area is between 20 mph to 40 mph 32 km h to 64 km h Green average speed in this area is 45 mph 1
331. when the CD TEXT disc is used When using a normal You can use the navigation system to control a music CD they are displayed as multi CD player which is sold separately O Only those functions described in this man ual are available for multi CD player De Touch panel key operation pending on the multi CD player the function may be invalid Touch the source icon and then touch M CD to select the multi CD player When the source icon is not displayed you Selecting M CD as the source can display it by touching the screen Touch panel keys AL POd GD IN 8 gt 4Nnos AY y Busy Touch the source icon and touch M CD gt For details refer to Se ecting a source on page 97 Screen configuration hee Down O When the multi CD player has performed Miaa E Ta the preparatory operations Ready is dis played O Ifthe multi CD player does not operate properly an error message such as 8 Error XX may be displayed Refer to the multi CD player owner s manual O If there are no discs in the multi CD player magazine No Disc is displayed 1 Change the disc in the magazine 2 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause Taa koJ PAv settings i S H Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing 3 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the disc currently playing 4
332. which playback method has been se lected 6 Artist name indicator Shows the name of the artist currently play ing when available 7 Play time indicator Chapter Using the AV Source Music Library 13 Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track Track list and playlist Shows the track list or the playlist currently playing or temporary displayed The EJ icon on the left indicates that the item is a Playlist and the J icon indicates that the item is a Track Title display Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information visit www gracenote com O If no title information exists in the Grace note Database on the built in hard disk drive the date when the track was recorded is entered automatically If you want to dis play the title information enter the title manually after recording has finished gt For details refer to Changing the title of the playlist or track on page 119 Relationship of groups playlists and tracks The music library is organized as follows with three levels groups playlists and tracks There are four types of groups e Album group Albums Stores the recorded track data in its origi nal order One playlist is automatically cre ated when a CD is recorded e Artist group Artists Stores
333. y is not sub divided into more de tailed categories the list will not be displayed Chapter Setting a Route to Your Destination 06 Proceed to Step 6 6 Input the name of the facilities You can also narrow down the candidates by specifying the city before the name input gt For more details about Subsequent Opera tions refer to Searching for POIs by specifying a category first on the previous page Searching for POIs by specifying a city name first 1 Touch Destination in the navigation menu and then touch POI Search 2 Touch the state code key of the destina tion and select the state or province or ter ritory gt For more details about Selecting the state or province where you want to search refer to Calculating your destination by using Address Search on page 28 3 Touch City 4 Input the name of the city that has the facility you want to search for Auto fill in function is available gt For details refer to Auto fill in function on page 30 A list of cities that include the entered charac ters appear List Lists candidates based on the yellow charac ters in the text box Suggested characters in white are invalid Touch the desired city in the list to proceed to the next step 5 Input the name of the facilities You can also narrow down the candidates by specifying the category before the name input gt For more details about Subsequent Opera tions re
334. y of XM Navtrattic data de pends on the ability of the antenna to re ceive a signal The signal may be unavailable if obstructed e g by buildings mountains trees bridges bad weather etc XM Naviratfic data also may be una vailable or not current if the original data source is not providing data e g sched uled or unscheduled downtime or has not been updated or if there is a time lag be tween the time when the original data source is updated and when you receive the updated XM NavlIraftic data O Depending on the amount of data being transmitted in your area it may take several minutes to display all of the available data O The information content depends on the in formation provided by XM NavTrattic Ser vice including data refreshing and availability timing I Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the accuracy of the information transmitted I Pioneer does not bear responsibility for changes to information services provided by XM such as cancellation of the services or subscription updates O Traffic information is not taken into account when calculating estimated time of arrival time or travel time for your destination Notes for Hard Disk Drive Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what defines lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy Copy ing of copyright material such as films
335. yed touch Enter This starts playback from the selected scene With discs featuring a menu you can also touch Menu or Top Menu and then make selections from the displayed menu Entering the numerical commands You can use this function when you need to enter a numerical command during DVD play back 1 Touch 10Key Search and then touch 10key Mode 10key mode Using the AV Source Built in DVD Drive and Radio 2 Touch 0 9 to input the desired num ber 3 While the input number is displayed touch Enter Operating the Radio FM You can listen to the radio by using the naviga tion system This section describes operations for Radio FM Selecting FM as the source Touch the source icon and touch FM gt For details refer to Se ecting a source on page 97 Screen configuration M Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to FM1 to FM3 3 Preset number indicator Shows the program type of the current station when available 4 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned Preset list display Shows the preset list 6 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on 7 STEREO indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo m Touch panel key operation Touch the source icon and then touch FM to select the radio FM When the source icon is

Pioneer AVIC Z3 Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents